IBM Personal Computer RS 6000 7025 User Manual

IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series  
IBM  
User's Guide  
SA38-0540-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Communications Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement  
. . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du Canada  
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement  
VCCI Statement  
Radio Protection for Germany  
.
viii  
. . . . . . . . viii  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ix  
x
x
VCCI Statement  
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xi  
xi  
Electrical Safety  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Laser Safety Information  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii  
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv  
About This Book  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
ISO 9000  
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii  
Chapter 1. System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Unpacking Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Starting the System  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Finishing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Starting the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Stopping the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Reading the Operator Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Using the Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Using the Three–Button Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Using the 3.5–Inch Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Using the CD–ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Using the Hot Swap Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
General Information for 8-mm Tape Drive  
Using the 5.0GB 8-mm Tape Drive  
General Information for 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Preface iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37  
Chapter 3. System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Graphical System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Config  
MultiBoot:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Password  
Error Log  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
RIPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
SCSI ID  
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Text-Based System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Service Processor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
General User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Privileged User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Service Processor Functions and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Chapter 5. Installing Options  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Expansion Bays  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Input/Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Removing the Front Covers Only  
Removing Both the Front and Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Removing the I/O Planar Cover  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18  
Memory-Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24  
Removing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28  
Installing Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30  
Removing Adapters  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34  
Upgrading or Adding a CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37  
Installing Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41  
Installing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive, or CD-ROM in Bay A or Bay B . . . . . . . 5-44  
Installing a SCSI Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51  
Installing a SSA Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E.  
Installing a SCSI Backplane in Bank D or E  
Installing a SSA Backplane in Bank D, or E  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66  
Removing Internal Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81  
. . . . 5-82  
Removing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive, or CD-ROM from Bay A or Bay B  
Removing a SCSI Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83  
iv IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a SSA Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87  
Installing a U-Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91  
Replacing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93  
Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96  
Replacing the I/O Planar Cover  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Sources for the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Online Diagnostics Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Standalone Diagnostic Operation  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Physical Location Codes  
AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
AIX Location Codes  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Introduction to Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
AIX Shell Prompt Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Backup/Restore Media Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Configure Surveillance Policy Service Aid  
Configure Reboot Policy Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid  
Dials and LPFK Configuration Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Disk Based Diagnostic Update Service Aid and Update Disk Based Diagnostic  
Task  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Disk Media Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Disk Maintenance Service Aid  
Diskette Media Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Display or Change Configuration or Vital Product Data (VPD) Service Aid . . . 7-13  
Display and Change Diagnostic Test List Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results Service Aid  
Display Test Patterns Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Enhanced SCSI Display Configuration Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Generic Microcode Download Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Hardware Error Report Service Aid and Display Hardware Error Log Task  
ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid  
Machine Check Error Log Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Microcode Download Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Periodic Diagnostics Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
SCSI Bus Analyzer Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
. . 7-17  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Preface  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Tape Utilities Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22  
Service Hints Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Update System or Service Processor Flash Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Display Firmware Device Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
Display Resource Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
7135 RAIDant Array Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25  
Chapter 8. Using the System Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Step 3. Running System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Step 4. Additional System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics . . . . . . . 9-1  
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Appendix A. System Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Record the Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Device Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Appendix B. Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Testing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Configuration File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
Modem Configuration Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1  
Reader's Comments — We'd Like to Hear From You . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-3  
vi IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Statements  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. Neither the provider nor the manufacturer are responsible  
for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended  
cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this  
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement  
This product has been designed and built to comply with IEC Standard 950.  
United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements  
This equipment is manufactured to the International Safety Standard EN60950 and  
as such is approved in the UK under the General Approval Number  
NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to the public telecommunication network.  
The network adapter interfaces housed within this equipment are approved  
separately, each one having its own independent approval number. These interface  
adapters, supplied by the manufacturer, do not use or contain excessive voltages. An  
excessive voltage is one which exceeds 70.7 V peak ac or 120 V dc. They interface  
with this equipment using Safe Extra Low Voltages only. In order to maintain the  
separate (independent) approval of the manufacturer's adapters, it is essential that  
Preface vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
other optional cards, not supplied by the manufacturer, do not use main voltages or  
any other excessive voltages. Seek advice from a competent engineer before  
installing other adapters not supplied by the manufacturer.  
European Union (EU) Statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive  
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility.  
Neither the provider nor the manufacturer can accept responsibility for any failure to  
satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non–recommended modification  
of the product, including the fitting of option cards not supplied by the manufacturer.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22 / European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication devices.  
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du  
Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement  
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement  
This Class A digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian  
Interference–Causing Equipment Regulations.  
VCCI Statement  
The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above.  
viii IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for  
Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a  
radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio  
interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.  
When used near a radio or TV receiver, it may become the cause of radio  
interference.  
Read the instructions for correct handling.  
Radio Protection for Germany  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG vom  
9.Nov.92 das EG–Konformitätszeichen zu führen.  
Der Aussteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die IBM Germany.  
Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse B.  
Preface ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: If any of the following Feature Codes are installed:  
3615, 4356, 4357, 4358, 4359, 6218, 8130, or 8134,  
or if a configuration using more than one SysKonnect FDDI adapter (Feature  
Codes 2741, 2742, or 2743) where any one of them is Feature Code 2743  
(SysKonnect SK-NET FDDI-UP SAS PCI), the following statement applies:  
European Union (EU) Statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive  
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility. The manufacturer cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of option cards supplied by third  
parties. Consult with your dealer or sales representative for details on your specific  
hardware.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22 / European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
VCCI Statement  
The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above.  
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for  
Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used  
in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs,  
the user may be required to take corrective actions.  
x
IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Notices  
A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing  
death or serious personal injury.  
A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing  
moderate or minor personal injury.  
Electrical Safety  
Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or  
disconnecting devices attached to the workstation.  
DANGER  
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous  
voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the  
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet  
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.  
Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power  
cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.  
When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,  
ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before  
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power  
cables from the existing system before you add a device.  
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables  
to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different  
electrical potentials.  
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations,  
printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.  
CAUTION:  
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's  
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid  
electrical shock.  
Preface xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DANGER  
To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from  
the electrical outlet before relocating the system.  
xii IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Safety Information  
The optical drive in this system unit is a laser product. The optical drive has a label  
that identifies its classification. The label, located on the drive, is shown below.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE  
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1  
IEC 825:1984 CENELEC EN 60 825:1991  
The optical drive in this system unit is certified in the U.S. to conform to the  
requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal  
Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere,  
the drive is certified to conform to the requirements of the International  
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 825 (1st edition 1984) and CENELEC EN 60  
825:1991 for Class 1 laser products.  
CAUTION:  
A class 3 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the drive  
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the drive as it  
is not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.  
Class 1 laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The optical drive  
contains internally a Class 3B gallium-arsenide laser that is nominally 30 milliwatts at  
830 nanometers. The design incorporates a combination of enclosures, electronics,  
and redundant interlocks such that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a  
Class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing conditions.  
Preface xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Cables  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
10  
11  
Index  
Part Number  
Country  
1
1838574  
Bahamas, Barbados, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Costa Rica,  
Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Ecuador, Guatemala, Guyana,  
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Netherlands Antilles, Panama,  
Peru, Philippines, Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad, Tobago, U.S.A.  
(except Chicago), Venezuela  
2
6952300  
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman  
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El  
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan,  
Korea (South), Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,  
Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Trinidad,  
Taiwan, U.S.A. (except Chicago), Venezuela  
2
3
4
62X1045  
6952311  
13F9979  
Chicago, U.S.A.  
Argentina, Australia, New Zealand  
Abu Dhabi, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Botswana, Egypt, Finland,  
France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Indonesia, Korea (South),  
Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,  
Saudi Arabia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Turkey, Yugoslavia  
5
6
7
13F9997  
14F0015  
14F0033  
Denmark  
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka  
Bahrain, Bermuda, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Ghana,  
Hong Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi,  
Malaysia, Nigeria, Oman, People's Republic of China, Qatar,  
Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab  
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Zambia  
xiv IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
8
Part Number  
14F0051  
Country  
Liechtenstein, Switzerland  
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy  
Israel  
9
14F0069  
10  
11  
14F0087  
6952291  
Paraguay, Colombia, Uruguay  
Preface xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Book  
This book provides information on how to install and remove options, use the  
system, use diagnostics, use service aids, and verify system operation. This book  
also provides information to help you solve some of the simpler problems that might  
occur.  
ISO 9000  
ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and  
manufacturing of this product.  
Related Publications  
The following publications are available:  
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series Service Guide contains reference  
information, maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs), error codes, removal and  
replacement procedures, and a parts catalog.  
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems contains  
diagnostic information, service request numbers (SRNs), and failing function  
codes (FFCs).  
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus  
Systems contains information about adapters, devices, and cables for your  
system. This manual is intended to supplement the service information found in  
the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.  
Ÿ The Site and Hardware Planning Information contains information to help you  
plan your installation.  
Trademarks  
Ÿ AIX is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines  
Corporation.  
Ÿ PowerPC is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.  
Preface xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. System Startup  
Thank you for selecting an IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series system!  
The IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series system combines PowerPC 604 microprocessor  
performance and system expandability, ensuring that your system adapts to handle  
ever-changing operating requirements. The system is specifically designed to  
support the demands of network environments.  
The IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series system incorporates the new, advanced  
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus, which is faster than the industry  
standard architecture (ISA) bus. But the system also offers ISA as a additional bus  
architecture, to accommodate businesses that already have invested in ISA and  
ISA-based devices.  
This book helps you set up and use the system, install and remove options,  
configure the system, and use the system programs that are provided. This book  
also provides information to help you solve some of the simpler problems that might  
occur, and how to obtain assistance and service. Appendix A, “System Records” on  
page A-1 provides a section for you to record all the important information about  
your system.  
Chapter 1. System Startup 1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Begin  
Ÿ Make sure you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical outlets  
for your system, display, and any other options you intend to install.  
Ÿ Place your system in a location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage  
your system.  
Ÿ Always operate your system in the upright position and do not place any heavy  
objects on top of your system.  
Ÿ Leave about 51 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides of the system to allow the  
system's cooling system to work properly.  
Ÿ Collect the following tools, and keep them handy:  
– Small flat-blade screwdriver  
– Medium flat-blade screwdriver  
– Trays to hold screws  
Ÿ Before continuing, refer to the System Unit Safety Information book for Danger  
and Caution notices. Do not plug any cables into system unit, adapters, or  
electrical outlets until you have reviewed this information.  
Make sure none of the power cords are connected before continuing.  
1-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unpacking Your System  
CAUTION:  
To avoid possible injury while moving or lifting the system, ask another person  
to help you.  
Moving the System  
When the system is in the normal upright position, move it by lifting up on the handle  
on the front and moving it forward or backward as shown. (There is a roller built into  
the rear of the system's base.)  
Chapter 1. System Startup 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preinstallation Checklist  
After you unpack your system, display or ASCII terminal, and optional devices, make  
sure you have the following items:  
Ø
Ø
System and power cord  
ASCII terminal (or keyboard, keyboard cable, display, display cable, and  
display power cord)  
Ø
Ø
Mouse (if using display and keyboard)  
Other publications and media (for example, CD-ROM) that came with the  
system  
Ø
Options you want to install  
Contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative if any items are missing  
or damaged.  
1-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Cables  
1. If you are using a keyboard, attach the keyboard cable to the keyboard  
connector (  
).  
2. If you are installing a mouse or other pointing device, connect that cable to the  
mouse connector ( ).  
3. If you are using a display, attach the display to the display connector on the back  
of the display adapter in one of the expansion slots. See the About Your  
Machine document for information on preinstalled adapters.  
4. If you are using an ASCII terminal, connect the terminal to serial port 1 (  
).  
5. Connect the display or ASCII terminal power cord to the display or ASCII  
terminal.  
6. Attach adapter cables to any adapters installed in the expansion slots. See the  
About Your Machine document for information on preinstalled adapters. For  
more instructions on adapter cabling, see the documentation that came with your  
adapter, or to the IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and Cable Information for  
Multiple Bus Systems.  
7. Make sure the system's power is turned off.  
8. Connect the system connector power cord to the power connector. Secure all  
these connections, then plug the display power cord and the system power cord  
into properly grounded electrical outlets.  
Chapter 1. System Startup 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the System  
1. Open the door. If the diskette drive contains packing material or a diskette,  
remove it from the drive.  
2. Remove the extra key and ID tag that is taped inside the door and store them in  
a secure place.  
3. Turn on all external devices, such as printers, plotters, or modems.  
1-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Press the Power On switch.  
5. Check your display or ASCII terminal for configuration information displayed as  
the power-on self-test (POST) begins. The system beeps once to indicate it is  
working properly.  
If no operating system is installed, you are prompted to select the operating  
system installation device.  
Chapter 1. System Startup 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finishing the Installation  
Important  
Ÿ Be sure to maintain at least 51 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides of the system  
to allow the system's cooling system to work properly. Blocking the air vents  
can cause overheating, which might result in a malfunction or permanent  
damage.  
Your system hardware is set up, and you are ready to learn about your system and  
make backup copies of important software. The order in which you do these tasks is  
up to you. Use the following checklist as a guide.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Record your identification numbers  
Your system has important identification information that you might need if you  
have it serviced. Appendix A, “System Records” on page A-1 shows where to  
find these numbers, and provides space to record and retain this information.  
Install options  
If you decided earlier to delay installing your options, you might want to  
complete these installations now. See Chapter 5, “Installing Options” on  
page 5-1 for handling and installation instructions.  
Install the Operating System  
If AIX is preinstalled in your system unit, or if you plan to install AIX yourself,  
refer to the Quick Installation and Startup Guide for instructions.  
Some options that you might install come with a diskette that contains device  
drivers, configuration files, or test programs. To install these files (after your  
operating system is installed), follow the instructions that come with the  
diskettes.  
Ø
Install application programs  
To install application programs, follow the instructions supplied with each  
application program.  
1-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit  
Starting the System Unit  
1. Set the power switches of the attached devices to On.  
Note: When the system is plugged in but not powered on, the Power On LED  
flashes slowly.  
2. Press the Power On switch.  
When you press the Power On switch, the Power On LED comes on and the  
system starts a POST (power-on self test).  
During POST, progress codes display in the operator panel display.  
3. If the Power On light does not come on and there is no indication of power when  
you press the Power On switch, ensure that the power cord, located at the back  
of the system unit, is plugged into a grounded electrical outlet. If this does not  
solve the problem, go to Chapter 9, “Hardware Problem Determination” on  
page 9-1. If the LED is not flashing and OK is not displayed in the display, go to  
the section on running the diagnostics.  
Stopping the System Unit  
Attention: When using the shutdown procedure for your system, enter the correct  
command before you stop the system unit. Failure to do so may result in the loss of  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
data. If you need information on the shutdown procedure for your operating system,  
see your operating system documentation.  
1. Before stopping the system unit, you must first perform a shutdown procedure of  
the operating system to prevent the loss of data.  
2. After you shut down the operating system, set the power switches of the  
attached devices to Off.  
3. The system unit is powered down by the shut down procedure.  
2-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reading the Operator Panel Display  
The operator panel display is used to:  
Ÿ Track the progress of the system unit self tests and configuration program.  
Ÿ Display codes when the operating system comes to an abnormal end.  
Ÿ Display system messages.  
During power-on self-test (POST), 4 characters display indicating the progress of the  
testing. If an error is detected that requires attention, the system unit halts and an 8  
digit number displays in the operator panel display to identify the error.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Keyboards  
There are several keyboards available for the system unit. The keyboards have  
various keys that enter data and control the cursor location. The keyboards can be  
engraved for the languages of different countries.  
The functions of each keyboard depend on the software used. The character sets for  
the keyboards are contained and explained in the information for your operating  
system.  
The keyboard is divided into four sections:  
Ÿ Function keys are multipurpose keys and their function is controlled by the  
operating system.  
Ÿ Typewriter keys are similar to a standard typewriter. Their function is controlled  
by the software.  
Ÿ Control keys move the cursor on the screen and do programmed control  
functions. The movement and functions depend upon the application used.  
Ÿ Numeric keypad is arranged like a calculator to help when typing numbers.  
2-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On all of the keyboards, you can adjust the tilt position for typing comfort. To tilt the  
keyboard, pull out on the keyboard legs. The legs snap into position. To decrease  
the tilt of the keyboard, rotate the keyboard legs until they snap into the bottom of  
the keyboard case.  
The keyboard cable plugs into the keyboard connector at the rear of the system unit.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Three–Button Mouse  
The mouse is a hand–operated locating device. A three–button mouse is available  
for use with the system unit.  
Consult your application publication for the exact use of the three–button mouse.  
You can use the mouse to perform such functions as positioning a cursor, selecting  
items from a menu, or moving around in your document much easier and faster than  
if you used only the keyboard. The cursor moves exactly as you move the mouse on  
a flat surface, such as a desktop.  
When you move the mouse around on a flat surface as shown in this illustration, the  
cursor moves on the display screen; the movement changes the position of the  
cursor.  
2-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With the mouse buttons, you can perform functions such as selecting and  
deselecting options, extending your selection, or choosing a command. The precise  
function of your mouse depends on the software you are using.  
The mouse has a cable that plugs into the mouse connector at the rear of the  
system unit.  
Handling the Mouse Correctly  
For best operation, handle the mouse with care. Incorrect handling can damage the  
mouse.  
Do not:  
Ÿ Operate the mouse on cloth, unfinished wood, newspaper, or carpet.  
Ÿ Drop or hit the mouse.  
Ÿ Carry the mouse by holding onto the cable.  
Ÿ Expose the mouse to extreme temperatures or direct sunlight.  
Ÿ Place the mouse in liquid spills.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care of the Mouse  
The operating surface for the mouse should be smooth, clean, and flat. For  
example, you can operate the mouse on the following surfaces:  
Ÿ Finished wood  
Ÿ Glass  
Ÿ Enamel  
Ÿ Plastic  
Ÿ Paper (except newspaper)  
Ÿ Metal  
Rough surfaces collect contaminants that can be transferred to the interior of the  
mouse by the ball. The surface you use should be free from spills, dirt, dust, lint,  
wax, eraser dust, and other foreign matter. Rough surfaces can also cause the pads  
located on the bottom of the mouse to prematurely wear. A deeply pitted surface  
could cause erratic operation of the mouse.  
Ÿ Inspect the work surface for spills or other contaminants.  
Ÿ Dust the work surface.  
Ÿ If you are using a paper pad, inspect it for wear and replace it if necessary.  
2-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Mouse  
1. Remove the retaining ring by turning it counterclockwise, in the direction of the  
arrow as shown in the illustration.  
2. Remove the ball.  
3. Inspect the ball for contaminants. Wipe it clean with a dry, lint–free cloth.  
4. If the ball is dirty, wash it in warm, soapy water. Rinse and wipe the ball with a  
lint–free cloth until dry.  
5. Inspect the ball cavity in the mouse for foreign materials. If there are any foreign  
materials, remove them.  
6. Replace the ball.  
7. Replace the retaining ring on the mouse and align it with the open slots in the  
ball cavity.  
8. Turn the retaining ring clockwise until the open slots are covered and you hear  
the ring snap into place.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the 3.5–Inch Diskette Drive  
Diskette Compatibility  
The system unit has a 1.44MB diskette drive installed vertically in the front.  
The 1.44MB diskette drive can format, read, and write diskettes compatible with the  
following diskette drives:  
Ÿ 1.0MB diskettes with 720KB formatted data capacity.  
Ÿ 2.0MB diskettes with 1.44MB formatted data capacity (HD).  
Format the diskette according to its specified capacity.  
Write–Protecting 3.5–Inch Diskettes  
Write–protecting diskettes is necessary so that important information is not  
accidentally lost.  
When diskettes are write–protected, you can read information from the diskettes, but  
you cannot write information on to them.  
There is a write–protect tab on the 3.5–inch diskette.  
To locate the write–protect tab, turn the diskette over with the label facing down.  
Ÿ To prevent writing onto a diskette, slide the write–protect tab, to open the protect  
slot.  
2-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ To allow writing onto a diskette, slide the write–protect tab to cover the protect  
slot.  
Loading and Unloading the 3.5–Inch Diskette  
To load a diskette into the drive, insert the diskette in the diskette drive with the  
labeled metal shutter first. Push the diskette into the drive until you hear a click.  
The click indicates that the diskette is securely in position in the drive.  
To unload the diskette, push the diskette–unload button. The diskette unloads  
partially from the drive. Pull the diskette out.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the CD–ROM Drive  
CAUTION:  
A Class 3 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the device  
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the device, as it  
is not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.  
The CD–ROM is located in bay A1 of the system unit, see page 2-15. Your  
CD–ROM drive looks like the one shown in the illustration, and the controls are  
located as indicated.  
When the CD–ROM is set to On, the status light indicates one of several conditions.  
The following are status light states and the respective conditions of the CD–ROM  
drive:  
Ÿ Off during standby with the tray loaded or unloaded.  
Ÿ Blinks from insertion of the tray to completion of initialization.  
Ÿ Blinks slowly when disc is dusty.  
Ÿ Blinks fast when in the audio mode.  
Ÿ Lights during data transfer operations.  
Ÿ Lights steady when:  
– No disc is in the tray.  
– The disc is in the tray upside down.  
– Some condition exists that should be checked. If this occurs, contact your  
service representative.  
2-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the CD–ROM Drive  
Press the unload button to open the tray. Place the disc, with the printed side away  
from the tray, into the tray. Slip out the bottom tabs to hold the disc in place. Push  
gently on the load/unload button. The drive automatically pulls the tray into the drive  
and prepares the disc for reading.  
Unloading the CD–ROM Drive  
Push and hold the unload button until the drawer comes out and then remove the  
disc.  
Cleaning the CD–ROM Drive  
This CD–ROM drive has an internal head–cleaning mechanism, and therefore does  
not require an external cleaning device. The internal cleaning mechanism cleans the  
head every time the tray is operated.  
Always handle discs carefully by the edges to avoid leaving fingerprints or scratching  
the disc. (This helps the disc to maintain good readability.) Discs can be wiped with a  
soft, lint–free cloth or lens tissue. Always wipe in a straight line from the inner hub to  
the outer rim.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency Eject  
Note: Execute the following procedure only in an emergency (tray will not eject  
although pressing the unload button).  
1. Insert a small diameter rod, such as a straightened paper clip, into the  
emergency eject hole. (Refer to the illustration below for the location of the  
emergency eject hole.)  
2. Push the tool in until some resistance is felt.  
3. Maintain a small amount of pressure on the rod while pulling on the tray with  
your finger nail.  
4. Pull the tray open and remove the disc.  
Note: Normally the tray makes a ratcheting sound when pulling it open using the  
above procedure.  
2-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Hot Swap Disk Drives  
For information on installing hot swap drives refer to “Installing a SCSI Disk Drive in  
Bank C, D, or E.” on page 5-51.  
For information on removing hot swap drives refer to “Removing a SCSI Disk Drive  
from Bank C, D, or E” on page 5-83.  
Relationship of AIX Prompts and Physical Drive Location  
A SCSI adapter and a SCSI drive address can be displayed on a user display. The  
AIX command lscfg list the attached devices on the system display. A SCSI adapter  
and drives might be listed as:  
Labels on the right side of each bank, identify the PCI Bus indicator and PCI Slot  
address for the SCSI adapter attached to each bank.  
Physical Slot of SCSI Adapter  
Bank Label  
30 - 78  
30 - 70  
30 - 68  
30 - 60  
10 - 78  
10 - 70  
10 - 68  
20 - 60  
20 - 58  
30 - 58  
10 - 60  
9I/P  
8I/P  
7P  
6P  
5P  
4P  
3P  
2P  
1P  
Second Integrated SCSI Controller  
First Integrated SCSI Controller  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Guidelines  
The hot-swap disk drive is a sensitive device. Handle the hot-swap carrier and disk  
drive with care.  
Ÿ Do not drop the disk drive or subject the drive to excessive shock.  
Ÿ Do not expose the disk drive to temperatures lower than -40° F (-40° C) or  
higher than 158 ° F (70° C).  
Ÿ If drive temperature changes, allow approximately one hour of temperature  
acclimatization for every 18° F (10° C) of temperature change.  
Ÿ Never allow moisture to condense on the drive.  
Ÿ Static electricity can damage your equipment. Take these precautions to avoid  
static electricity damage:  
– Always handle your disk drive carefully.  
– Handle the drive by the edges and never touch any exposed circuitry.  
– Prevent others from touching the drive.  
Ÿ Store the hot-swap disk drive in a protective container such as an instrument  
case or in a protected area.  
Ÿ Failure to observe these precautions may lead to product failure, damage, and  
invalidation of all warranties.  
Ÿ Media can take as link as 30 seconds to spin down. Make sure that there is at  
least a 30 second delay before switching off the hot-swap drives for removal.  
Labels  
Several labels are included in your system ship group which may be attached to the  
handle of the hot-swap drive. The labels may be marked in any way that the user  
can easily identify the drive for removal or installation.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disk Drive Status LED States  
SCSI Disk Drives: The following table explains the meaning of the green and  
amber status LEDs and spin down button.  
Status LEDs  
LED or Button  
Status  
On  
Definition  
Amber  
Drive spinning  
Off  
Drive not spinning  
Power On  
Green  
On  
Off  
Power Off  
Blinking  
Depressed  
Power Off/Drive identify  
Spin down drive and remove power  
Spin down  
2-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSA Disk Drives: The following table explains the meaning of the Power, Ready  
and Check status LEDs.  
Status LEDs  
LED  
Status  
On  
Definition  
Power On  
Power Off  
Power  
Off  
Ready  
Check  
On  
Both SSA connections good and  
drive is ready  
Blinking  
Flickering  
On  
Only one SSA connection good  
Drive is executing a command  
Disk drive failure  
Self-test running  
Drive in service mode  
Disk drive selected  
Blinking  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information for 8-mm Tape Drive  
Recommendations  
Ÿ Use only Data Grade 8-mm tape cartridges. These cartridges are identified by  
either a Data, D, or D8 marking on the data cartridge. Use of video grade  
cartridges can damage the 8-mm tape drive and can void the warranty of your  
8-mm tape drive, and data written on these tapes may be lost over a short period  
of time.  
Ÿ Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive when it is not in use, and store  
the cartridge in the cartridge case.  
Ÿ Do not open the door on the data tape cartridge. This door covers and protects  
the magnetic tape material from dirt, dust, and damage.  
Ÿ Avoid touching the tape since this can cause loss of data.  
Ÿ Keep the tape drive door closed except when loading or unloading a tape  
cartridge.  
Ÿ Back up and then discard any tape cartridge that repeatedly produces error  
messages. The error information is in the system error log.  
Ÿ Clean the tape path regularly according to the cleaning procedure of the 8-mm  
tape drive. Use only recommended cleaning cartridges; other cleaning cartridges  
can permanently damage your 8-mm tape drive.  
Attention: Do not use video grade cartridges in the 8-mm tape drive. Video grade  
tapes may be unreliable and may cause permanent damage to the 8-mm tape drive.  
Types of 8-mm Tape Cartridges  
Ÿ Test Tape Cartridge: This is a specially labeled tape cartridge that is in the  
media kit with the 8-mm tape drive. Use this cartridge only when checking the  
operation of the drive or running diagnostics; do not use it to save programs or  
data.  
Ÿ Data Tape Cartridge: This is a non-labeled blank tape cartridge that is in the  
media kit. Use this cartridge for saving your programs or data. The same data  
tape cartridge can be used in either a 2.3GB 8-mm tape drive or a 5.0GB 8-mm  
tape drive.  
Ÿ Cleaning Tape Cartridge: Use this cartridge for cleaning the 8-mm tape path. For  
more information, see “Cleaning the Tape Path on the 5.0GB 8-mm Tape Drive”  
on page 2-29.  
2-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
The 8-mm tape drive is compatible with existing 8-mm tape subsystems that comply  
to the American National Standard (ANSI) X3B5/89-136, Helical-scan Digital  
Computer Tape Cartridge, 8-mm for Information Exchange. Data compression  
effectively increases the cartridge capacity and data transfer rate for the 5.0GB tape  
cartridges.  
Note: 160 meter cartridges are not processed and are automatically ejected by the  
drive.  
Format Modes (C=compression mode)  
8-mm Tape Drive  
2.3GB  
2.3GB  
2.3GB (C)  
5.0GB  
5.0GB (C)  
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
5.0GB  
Read only  
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 8-mm Tape Cartridges  
Setting the write-protect tab on a tape cartridge is necessary so that information is  
not accidentally lost. When the write-protect tab of a tape cartridge is set (window  
closed), information can be read from the tape, but cannot be written to it.  
The window on the tape cartridge controls write-protection.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Environment Considerations for 8-mm Data Cartridges  
Information in this section describes operating and storage conditions including  
temperature, relative humidity, and maximum wet bulb data.  
Attention: The manufacturer has specified a set of temperature and humidity  
ranges in which the 8-mm data cartridge can operate with ease. Only regular  
cleaning procedures are required when operating the cartridge within this range. The  
risk of possible data loss is increased if 8-mm tape cartridges are operated, stored,  
or shipped outside the temperature or humidity ranges shown in the following table.  
Before using a cartridge, always let it adjust (acclimate) to the operating  
environment. Do this by placing the cartridge with its container in the operating  
environment for as long as it has been away from this environment or for 24 hours,  
whichever is less.  
Acclimation is necessary for any data cartridge that has been exposed to a different  
humidity environment or a temperature change of 11°C or 20°F or more.  
Operating Ranges  
Storage  
Shipping  
Temperature  
16°C to 32°C  
(60°F to 90°F)  
20 to 80%  
5°C to 32°C  
(40°F to 90°F)  
20 to 80%  
-40°C to 52°C  
(-40°F to 125°F)  
5 to 80%  
Relative Humidity  
(non-condensing)  
Maximum Wet Bulb  
26°C (79°F)  
26°C (79°F)  
26°C (79°F)  
2-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating in Harsh Environments  
The 8-mm tape drive is ideally suited to streaming operations, as opposed to tape  
movement operations involving multiple stop/starts and random searches. When the  
tape is used for frequent stop and start operations, streaming movement is beneficial  
and should be used whenever possible. This can be accomplished by ensuring that  
any save or restore operation is the only active operation performed by a device  
connected to this SCSI I/O controller.  
Any tape that has been used outside the ranges specified in the table on 2-22 for an  
extended period of time (50 passes in 40 hours of nonstop operation) should not be  
used as an archival tape. Exposure to the environment will deteriorate the magnetic  
and physical strength of the tape. Do not store important data on a tape that has  
been used outside the specified ranges; transfer the data to a new tape for reliable  
archiving.  
8-mm Data Cartridge Erasure  
Most bulk eraser devices do not have the capability to erase 8-mm data cartridges.  
To properly erase an 8-mm data cartridge with a bulk eraser device, the erasure  
rating must be at least 1500 oersted.  
The 2.3GB and the 5.0GB 8-mm tape drives erase residual data before writing new  
data on the data tape.  
Tape Cartridge Data Efficiency  
The 8-mm tape cartridge efficiency is defined as the amount of data that can be  
stored on the cartridge. The following variables affect the amount of data that can be  
stored on a tape cartridge:  
Ÿ Size of the data file  
Ÿ Number of file marks per file  
Ÿ File mark size used  
Ÿ Compatibility mode (2.3GB or 5.0GB)  
Ÿ Media rewrites.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the 5.0GB 8-mm Tape Drive  
The optional 5.0GB 8-mm tape drive is a half-height device.  
Status Lights  
The 5.0GB 8-mm tape drive has two green status lights and one amber status light.  
The on and off combinations of the status lights indicate the conditions of the 8-mm  
tape drive.  
Each of the International Organization for Standards (ISO) symbols located next to a  
status light indicates a specific condition of the tape drive as follows:  
2-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Light States  
The following table explains the meaning of the green and amber status lights.  
Status Lights on the 5.0GB 8-mm Tape Drive  
Status  
Ready  
(green)  
Busy  
(green)  
Disturbance  
(amber)  
The power-on self-test (POST) is running or the  
system has issued a Reset to the drive.  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
One of the following has occurred:  
Off or On  
Ÿ The power is off.  
Ÿ The POST has completed successfully, but  
no tape cartridge has been inserted.  
A tape cartridge has been inserted and the 8-mm  
tape drive is ready to receive commands from the  
system.  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off or On  
Off or On  
A tape cartridge has been inserted and the 8-mm  
tape drive is performing a tape load or unload  
operation.  
Flashing  
The tape is in motion and the 8-mm tape drive is  
busy running a device operation.  
On  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off or On  
Flashing  
The 8-mm tape drive has detected an internal  
fault that requires corrective action. If this occurs,  
see the following note.  
The tape path requires cleaning. Refer to  
“Cleaning the Tape Path on the 5.0GB 8-mm  
Tape Drive” on page 2-29.  
Off or On  
Off or  
Flashing  
On  
Note: If a fault or an error condition occurs, first try to recover by pressing the  
unload button. If this does not correct the fault, switch off the power to the 8-mm  
tape drive and then switch on the power to the drive. If the condition continues, call  
your service representative.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the 8-mm Tape Cartridge  
Before loading the tape cartridge, make sure the power is on and the write-protect  
tab on the tape cartridge is properly set. Refer to “Setting the Write-Protect Tab on  
8-mm Tape Cartridges” on page 2-21. The tape drive loads the tape from the  
cartridge and prepares it for reading and writing.  
To load the 8-mm tape cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 8-mm tape cartridge with the write-protect tab toward you  
and the window side of the cartridge facing to the right.  
2. Slide the tape cartridge into the opening on the front of the 8-mm tape drive until  
the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive and the drive door  
closes. The ready status light (green) goes on if the load operation was  
successful.  
The 8-mm tape drive is ready for data operations when the tape cartridge is inserted.  
After the cartridge is inserted into the tape drive, the tape takes about 25 seconds to  
load; this does not interfere with beginning the data operations.  
2-26 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Commands can be entered while the tape is loading. Any commands to the tape  
drive start running once the tape has finished loading. Commands not requiring the  
tape cartridge are run immediately.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unloading the 8-mm Tape Cartridge  
Before performing the unload operation, make sure the power to the 8-mm tape drive  
is on.  
To unload and eject the tape cartridge, press the unload button. The 8-mm tape  
drive rewinds the tape and then ejects the tape cartridge from the tape drive.  
After pressing the unload button, the following occurs:  
1. The ready status light goes off.  
2. The busy status light flashes during the unload operation.  
3. The busy status light will goes off when the cartridge is ejected from the tape  
drive.  
2-28 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The time required for a tape to rewind and unload is between 18 seconds and 3  
minutes, depending on the position of the tape when the unload button is pushed.  
If the tape cartridge cannot unload and has to be removed manually from the drive,  
contact your service representative.  
Cleaning the Tape Path on the 5.0GB 8-mm Tape Drive  
Attention: Do not use video cleaning cartridges in the 8-mm tape drive. Video  
cleaning cartridges can damage the 8-mm tape drive.  
The 8-mm tape path should be cleaned either approximately every 30 hours of tape  
motion or once a month, whichever occurs first. The 5.0GB 8-mm tape drive counts  
the number of hours of tape motion and indicates when the tape path requires  
cleaning when the lighted disturbance status light (amber) is on.  
More frequent cleaning may be required if the drive is operated in a dusty  
environment or in humid conditions. If the dust is allowed to accumulate, the drive  
has to perform more reads and writes. This can cause data loss, and may be  
prevented by regularly scheduled cleaning of the drive.  
The cleaning cartridge cleans the 8-mm tape drive. If you attempt to use an 8-mm  
cleaning cartridge more times than allowed, the tape drive automatically detects the  
error and ejects the cleaning cartridge. The disturbance status light (amber) remains  
on if it was on prior to the cleaning operation being attempted.  
Some video cleaning cartridges are extremely abrasive. An 8-mm tape drive may be  
permanently damaged after only a few cleaning operations using an abrasive-type  
cleaning cartridge.  
Before loading the cleaning cartridge, make sure the power to the 8-mm tape drive is  
on.  
To load the 8-mm cleaning cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 8-mm cleaning cartridge with the window side of the  
cartridge facing to the right.  
2. Slide the cleaning cartridge into the opening on the front of the 8-mm tape drive  
until the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the 8-mm cleaning cartridge has been fully inserted into the 8-mm tape drive,  
the following cleaning operations are performed automatically:  
1. The cleaning tape is loaded into the tape path.  
2. The drive is cleaned by moving the cleaning tape forward for approximately two  
minutes.  
3. The tape is unloaded and the cleaning cartridge is ejected from the tape drive  
when the cleaning operation is complete.  
4. A successful cleaning operation is indicated when the disturbance status light  
(amber) goes off.  
2-30 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information for 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
The 4.0GB 4-mm tape drive is a streaming tape drive that is used to:  
Ÿ Save and restore system data files.  
Ÿ Archive important records.  
Ÿ Distribute operating system software upgrades.  
The 4-mm tape drive can be attached to any system using a single-ended interface  
meeting the Small Computer System Interface ll (SCSI-ll) Standard ANSI  
X3.131-199X Rev. 10h.  
The 4-mm tape drive has the following features:  
Ÿ Capacity of 4.0 GB per cartridge. 8 GB is typical with data compression and with  
DDS2 data cartridges.  
The actual capacity per cartridge varies depending on the application and the  
type of data cartridge being used.  
Ÿ Data transfer rate is 400 KBps. 800 KBps is typical with data compression.  
Note: Data compression activated is the default setting from the factory. Data  
compression is usually controlled by the application software.  
Ÿ Read and write of DDS|||| tape cartridges in 2.0 GB per cartridge format.  
Ÿ A status light that indicates when it is time to clean the tape path.  
Ÿ Internal diagnostics that are activated when the 4 mm Diagnostic Cartridge is  
inserted and loaded into the drive.  
Ÿ Media recognition system: only data grade media can be written with this tape  
drive.  
The 4-mm tape drive uses a 4-mm data cartridge for saving and restoring your  
system data. The 4-mm tape drive writes and reads only 4-mm Digital Data Storage  
(DDS|||| or DDS2) cartridges.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommendations  
Attention: Tape cartridges that do not carry the proper DDS symbol cannot be  
written to and their use may cause the 4-mm tape drive to report an error.  
Ÿ Use only 4-mm Digital Data Storage (DDS|||| or DDS2) cartridges.  
Attention: Use of other than recommended cleaning cartridges can damage  
your tape drive and will void the drive warranty.  
Ÿ Clean the tape path by using the recommended cleaning cartridge. Follow the  
instructions on the cartridge.  
Ÿ Back up and then discard any tape cartridge that repeatedly produces error  
messages. The error information is in the system error log.  
Ÿ Do not open the door on the data cartridge that covers the tape. This door  
protects the magnetic tape material from dirt, dust, and damage.  
Ÿ Do not operate in a dusty environment.  
Ÿ Do not touch the tape material. Any substance transferred to the tape by  
touching it could cause loss of data.  
Types of 4-mm Tape Cartridges  
The 4-mm tape drive is shipped with three 4-mm cartridges to help start your tape  
operations immediately.  
4-mm Data Cartridge:  
4-mm Diagnostic Cartridge:  
Cleaning Cartridge:  
Use this non-labeled cartridge for saving or  
restoring your programs or data. Additional data  
cartridges can be ordered.  
Use this specially labeled cartridge to perform  
diagnostics on the drive. Do not use it to save or  
restore programs or data.  
Use this cartridge for cleaning the 4-mm tape path.  
For more information, see “Cleaning the Tape Path  
on the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive” on page 2-41.  
2-32 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
The 4-mm Tape Drive is compatible with existing 4mm tape subsystems that are  
designed to operate with Digital Data Storage approved media, which meet the  
following standards:  
Ÿ For DDS||||  
– American National Standard (ANSI) standard, X3.203-191, Helical-scan  
Digital Computer Tape Cartridge, 3.81mm.  
– European Computer Manufacturers Association (EMCA) standard,  
EMCA-150 , 3.81mm Wide Magnetic Tape Cartridge and DDS|||| format.  
Ÿ For DDS2  
– European Computer Manufacturers Association (EMCA) standard,  
EMCA/TC17/93/20, 3.81mm Wide Magnetic Tape Cartridge for Information  
Interchange Helical Scan Recording, DDS2 format.  
You cannot change the density setting of the drive, because the device reconfigures  
itself automatically, depending on the media type installed, as follows:  
Media Type  
Non-DDS  
DDS||||  
Device Configuration  
Read-only  
Read/write in 2.0GB mode only.  
Read in either density; write in 4.0GB mode only.  
DDS2  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 4-mm Tape Cartridges  
The window on the tape cartridge controls write-protection. When the write-protect  
tab of a tape cartridge is set (window open), information can be read from the tape,  
but cannot be written to it. When the write-protect tab of a tape cartridge is not set  
(window closed), information can be both written to and read from the tape. Trying to  
write to a 4-mm data cartridge with the window open causes an error.  
2-34 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Environmental Considerations for 4-mm Data Cartridges  
Information in this section describes operating and storage conditions including  
temperature, relative humidity, and maximum wet bulb data.  
Attention: The manufacturer has specified a set of temperature and humidity  
ranges in which the 4-mm data cartridge can operate with ease. Only regular  
cleaning procedures, as described in “Cleaning the Tape Path on the 4.0GB 4-mm  
Tape Drive” on page 2-41 are required when operating the cartridge within this  
range. The risk of possible data loss is increased if 4-mm tape cartridges are  
operated, stored, or shipped outside the temperature or humidity ranges shown in  
the following table.  
Before using a cartridge, always let it adjust (acclimate) to the operating  
environment. Do this by placing the cartridge with its container in the operating  
environment for as long as it has been away from this environment or for 24 hours,  
whichever is less.  
Acclimation is necessary for any data cartridge that has been exposed to a different  
humidity environment or a temperature change of 11°C or 20°F or more.  
Operating Ranges  
Storage  
Shipping  
Temperature  
16°C to 32°C  
(60°F to 90°F)  
20 to 80%  
5°C to 32°C  
(40°F to 90°F)  
20 to 80%  
-40°C to 52°C  
(-40°F to 125°F)  
5 to 80%  
Relative Humidity  
(non-condensing)  
Maximum Wet Bulb  
26°C (79°F)  
26°C (79°F)  
26°C (79°F)  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating in Harsh Environments  
The 4-mm tape drive is ideally suited to streaming operations, as opposed to tape  
movement operations involving multiple stop/starts and random searches. When the  
tape is used for frequent stop and start operations, streaming movement is beneficial  
and should be used whenever possible. This can be accomplished by ensuring that  
any save or restore operation is the only active operation performed by a device  
connected to this SCSI I/O controller.  
Any tape that has been used outside the ranges specified in the previous table for an  
extended period of time (50 passes in 40 hours of nonstop operation) should not be  
used as an archival tape. Exposure to the environment will deteriorate the magnetic  
and physical strength of the tape. Do not store important data on a tape that has  
been used outside the specified ranges; transfer the data to a new tape for reliable  
archiving.  
4-mm Data Cartridge Erasure  
Most bulk eraser devices do not have the capability to erase 4-mm data cartridges.  
To properly erase an 4-mm data cartridge with a bulk eraser device, the erasure  
rating must be at least 2000 oersted.  
The 4-mm tape drive erases residual data before writing new data on the data tape.  
Tape Cartridge Data Capacity  
The 4-mm tape cartridge capacity is defined as the amount of data that can be  
stored on the cartridge. The following variables affect the amount of data that can be  
stored on a tape cartridge:  
Ÿ Size of the data file  
Ÿ Number of file marks per file  
Ÿ Compatibility mode (2GB or 4GB)  
Ÿ Media rewrites.  
2-36 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
The optional 4.0GB 4-mm tape drive is a half-high device.  
Status Lights  
The 4.0GB 4-mm tape drive has two green status lights and one amber status light.  
The on and off combinations of the status lights indicate the conditions of the 4-mm  
tape drive.  
Each of the International Organization for Standards (ISO) symbols located over a  
status light indicates a specific condition of the tape drive as follows:  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Light States  
The following tables explain the meaning of the green and amber status lights.  
Ready (green)  
Read-Write (green)  
Disturbance (amber)  
Off  
No cartridge installed or  
error condition  
No cartridge or no activity  
No error condition  
Steady  
Flashing  
Cartridge installed or  
loading/unloading  
Cleaning required or worn  
media  
Power-on self- test in  
progress  
Cartridge activity  
Error condition  
Status Lights on the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
Ready  
Status  
Read-Write  
(green)  
Disturbance  
(amber)  
(green)  
LED test.  
On 2  
On 2  
On 2  
seconds at  
power on  
seconds at  
power on  
seconds at  
power on  
The power-on self-test (POST) is running or the  
Diagnostic Cartridge is running.  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
One of the following has occurred:  
Off  
Off  
Off or On  
Ÿ The power is off.  
Ÿ The POST has completed successfully, but  
no tape cartridge has been loaded.  
A tape cartridge has been inserted and the 4-mm  
Tape Drive is Ready to receive commands from  
the system.  
On  
Off  
Off or ON  
The tape is in motion and the 4-mm Tape Drive is  
running a device operation or cleaning.  
On  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off or On  
Flashing  
The 4-mm Tape Drive has detected an internal  
error that requires corrective action such as tape  
cartridge failure, high humidity, or no SCSI  
terminator. Refer to the service guide or contact  
your service representative. (See note below)  
The tape path requires cleaning or a poor quality  
tape cartridge is being used. See “Cleaning the  
Tape Path on the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive” on  
page 2-41.  
Off or On  
Off or  
Flashing  
On  
Note: If an error condition occurs, first try to recover by pressing the unload button.  
If this does not correct the error, switch off the power to the 4-mm tape drive and  
then switch on the power to the drive. If the condition continues, call your service  
representative.  
2-38 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the 4-mm Tape Cartridge  
Before loading the tape cartridge, make sure the power is on and the write-protect  
switch on the tape cartridge is properly set. Refer to “Setting the Write-Protect Tab  
on 4-mm Tape Cartridges” on page 2-34. The tape drive loads the tape from the  
cartridge and prepares it for reading and writing.  
To load the 4-mm tape cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 4-mm tape cartridge with the write-protect tab towards  
you and the window side of the cartridge facing up.  
2. Slide the tape cartridge into the opening on the front of the 4-mm tape drive until  
the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive and the drive door  
closes. The ready status light (green) goes on if the load operation was  
successful.  
The 4-mm tape drive is ready for data operations when the tape cartridge is inserted.  
After the cartridge is inserted into the tape drive, the tape takes about 15 seconds to  
load.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unloading the 4-mm Tape Cartridge  
Before performing the unload operation, make sure the power to the 4-mm tape drive  
is on.  
To unload and eject the tape cartridge, press the unload button. The 4-mm tape  
drive rewinds the tape and then ejects the tape cartridge from the tape drive.  
After pressing the unload button, the following occurs:  
1. The Read-Write status light flashes during the unload operation.  
2. The Ready status light and the Read-Write status light turns off when the  
cartridge is ejected from the tape drive.  
The time required for a tape to rewind and unload is between 10 seconds and 1.5  
minutes, depending on the position of the tape when the unload button is pushed.  
If the tape cartridge cannot unload and has to be removed manually from the drive,  
contact your service representative.  
2-40 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Tape Path on the 4.0GB 4-mm Tape Drive  
The 4-mm tape path should be cleaned either approximately every 30 hours of tape  
motion or once a month, whichever occurs first. The 4-mm tape drive monitors the  
recording quality of the tape cartridge and indicates that the tape path requires  
cleaning when the disturbance status light (amber) is on.  
More frequent cleaning may be required if the drive is operated in a dusty  
environment or in humid conditions. If the dust is allowed to accumulate, the drive  
has to perform more reads and writes. This can cause data loss, and may be  
prevented by regularly scheduled cleaning of the drive.  
The cleaning cartridge cleans the 4-mm tape drive 50 times before it needs to be  
discarded. If you attempt to use a 4-mm cleaning cartridge more than 50 times, the  
tape drive automatically detects the error and ejects the cleaning cartridge with the  
disturbance status light (amber) remaining on.  
Before loading the cleaning cartridge, make sure the power to the 4-mm tape drive is  
on.  
To load the 4-mm cleaning cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 4-mm cleaning cartridge with the window side of the  
cartridge facing up.  
2. Slide the cleaning cartridge into the opening on the front of the 4-mm tape drive  
until the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive.  
After the 4-mm cleaning cartridge has been fully inserted into the 4-mm tape drive,  
the following cleaning operations are performed automatically:  
1. The cleaning tape is loaded into the tape path.  
Chapter 2. Using the System Unit 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. The drive is cleaned by moving the cleaning tape forward for approximately 30  
seconds.  
3. The tape is unloaded and the cleaning cartridge is ejected from the tape drive  
when the cleaning operation is complete.  
4. A successful cleaning operation is indicated when the disturbance status light  
(amber) goes off (if it was activated before the cleaning operation).  
If the cleaning cartridge has been used more than 50 times the disturbance status  
light (Amber) will flash.  
2-42 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services  
The System Management Services make it possible for you to view information  
about your computer and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing  
device configurations.  
If you have chosen a graphical display as your system console, you can use the  
graphical System Management Services described below. If you are using an ASCII  
display as your system console, see “Text-Based System Management Services” on  
page 3-24.  
Graphical System Management Services  
To start the Open Firmware command line or graphical System Management  
Services, turn on or restart the computer.  
After the logo is displayed, initialization icons appear across the bottom of the  
screen.  
To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the F8 key after the  
keyboard icon appears during startup.  
If you have pressed the F8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK" prompt)  
appears after the initialization and power-on self test (POST) are complete.  
The Open Firmware command line is used to set up adapters that are not  
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation  
directs you to use this option if it is needed.  
To exit from the Open Firmware command enter reset-all or power the system  
down and reboot.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To enter the graphical System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware  
command line, you must press the F1 key after the keyboard icon appears during  
startup.  
After the System Management Services starts, the following screen appears.  
You may also press F8 here to enter the OK> prompt.  
3-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Management Services screen contains the following choices.  
Config: Enables you to view your system configuration.  
MultiBoot: Invokes the Mulitboot menu which provides several  
functions:  
Ÿ To Select a particular operating system to boot.  
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive  
a an informational icon after making this selection this  
would mean that information in non-volatile storage could  
have been lost, as would happen if the battery had been  
removed. In order to recreate this value, issue the bootlist  
command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to  
the location of the operating system in a particular hard  
disk. Please see the explanation of the bootlist command  
in your AIX documentation.  
Ÿ To select a particular operating system as the default  
operating system  
Ÿ To install from the list of possible devices  
Ÿ To set the sequence in which devices are searched for  
operating system startup code  
Ÿ To go to the Open Firmware command prompt  
Ÿ To set the Multiboot menu so that it comes up immediately  
as the system powers up  
Utilities: Enables you to set and remove passwords, enable  
the unattended start mode, set and view the addresses of your  
system's SCSI controllers, select the active console, view or  
clear the error log, and update your system firmware.  
Exit: Returns you to the previous screen.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To select an icon, move the cursor with the arrow keys to choose which icon is  
highlighted, then press the Enter key. You can also select an icon by clicking on it  
with your left mouse button. To leave the current screen, either press the Esc key or  
select the Exit icon.  
3-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Config  
Selecting this icon makes it possible for you to view information about the setup of  
your system unit. A list similar to the following appears when you select the Config  
icon.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the down arrow key or Page Down key displays the next configuration  
screen, which lists your computer's firmware version, the date of its development,  
and the firmware part number.  
The following screen is provided by the service processor.  
3-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MultiBoot:  
This selection invokes the Mulitboot menu which provides several functions:  
Ÿ To Select a particular operating system to boot.  
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a an informational  
icon after making this selection this would mean that information in non-volatile  
storage could have been lost, as would happen if the battery had been removed.  
In order to recreate this value, issue the bootlist command under AIX with the  
appropriate parameters as to the location of the operating system in a particular  
hard disk. Please see the explanation of the bootlist command in your AIX  
documentation.  
Ÿ To select a particular operating system as the default operating system  
Ÿ To install from the list of possible devices  
Ÿ To set the sequence in which devices are searched for operating system startup  
code  
Ÿ To go to the Open Firmware command prompt  
Ÿ To set the Multiboot menu so that it comes up immediately as the system powers  
up  
The Select Software option, if supported by the operating system, shows the names  
of the operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating  
systems.  
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a message saying that:  
No Operating System Installed  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
this would mean that information in non-volatile storage could have been lost, as  
would happen if the battery had been removed. In order to recreate this value issue  
the bootlist command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location of  
the operating system in a particular Hard disk. Please see the explanation of the  
bootlist command in your AIX documentation.  
The Software Default option, if supported by the operating system, lets you select the  
default operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by  
all operating systems.  
The Install From option produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, where  
the operating system is installed from. You select one of the devices and the system  
searches the device for an operating system to install and if supported by the  
operating system in that device, the name of the operating system displays.  
The Select Boot Device option provides a list of devices that can be selected to be  
stored on the boot list. Up to 5 devices are supported.  
The OK Prompt procvides access to the Open Firmware command prompt. The  
Open Firmware command prompt is used for debug purposes, and device driver  
development. Information about the commands that are available in the IEEE  
Standard 1275.  
The Multiboot Start option toggles between OFF and ON and selects if the Multiboot  
menu invokes automatically on startup or not.  
Boot  
This selection enables you to view and change the custom boot list (the sequence in  
which devices are searched for operating system startup code).  
3-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention: If you change your startup sequence, you must be extremely careful  
when performing write operations (for example, copying, saving, or formatting). You  
can accidentally overwrite data or programs if you select the wrong drive.  
The default boot sequence is:  
Ÿ The primary diskette drive  
Ÿ CD-ROM drive  
Ÿ Tape id=5 (slot=1)  
Ÿ Hard disk drive id=6 (Slot=1)  
Ÿ Network device.  
To change the custom boot list, enter a new order in the New column, then select  
Save. The List of Boot Devices is updated to reflect the order you have chosen.  
You can choose 1 to 5 devices for the custom boot list. To change the boot  
sequence back to the default values, select Default. (The default sequence is  
automatically saved.)  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities  
Selecting this icon enables you to perform various tasks and view additional  
information about your computer.  
The following describes the choices available on this screen.  
Password: Enables you to set password protection for turning  
on the computer and for using system administration tools.  
Error Log: Enables you to view and clear error log information  
for your computer.  
RIPL (Remote Initial Program Load): Allows you to select a  
remote system from which to load programs via a network  
adapter when your system unit is first turned on. This option  
also allows you to configure network adapters which require  
setup.  
3-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Update: Allows you to update the firmware programs on your  
computer.  
Console: If you have more than one display attached to your  
system unit, or if you have an ASCII terminal attached to your  
system unit in addition to a keyboard and display, this tool  
allows you to define which one is active.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Password  
When you select this icon, the following screen is displayed.  
Power-On Password: Setting a power-on password helps protect information stored  
in your computer. If a power-on password is set for your computer, the Power On  
icon is shown in the locked position; if a power-on password is not set, then the  
Power On icon is shown in the unlocked position (as in the screen above).  
When you select the Entry icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your  
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters  
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in  
the box.  
3-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the password again for  
verification.  
If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.  
After you have entered and verified the password, the power-on password icon  
flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that the power-on password is  
set.  
If you previously had set a power-on password and want to remove it, select the  
Remove icon.  
Note: If you forget the power-on password, you have to remove the battery for at  
least 30 seconds to disable this password. See Appendix B, “Replacing the  
Battery” on page B-1 for details.  
Attention: After you remove the battery, you must reconfigure your system (bootlist,  
IP parameters, console information, support processor, etc).  
A password can be set only after the system is turned off and on again.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Mode: The remote mode, when enabled, allows the system to start from  
the defined boot device. This mode is ideal for network servers and other computers  
that operate unattended. You must set a power-on password before you can enable  
the remote mode. When the remote mode is set, the icon changes to Remote  
<On>.  
If you remove the power-on password, the remote mode is automatically reset, and  
the icon returns to Remote <Off>.  
Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects against the  
unauthorized starting of the system programs.  
When you select the Entry icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your  
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters  
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in  
the box.  
Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the password again for  
verification.  
If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.  
3-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After you have entered and verified the password, the privileged-access password  
icon flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that your computer now  
requires the password you just entered before running system programs.  
Note: If you forget the power-on password, you have to remove the battery for at  
least 30 seconds to disable this password. See Appendix B, “Replacing the  
Battery” on page B-1 for details.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Log  
Selecting this icon displays the log of errors your computer has encountered during  
operations.  
Selecting the Clear icon erases the entries in this log.  
3-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RIPL  
Selecting the Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL) icon above gives you access to  
the following selections.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Set Address icon allows you to define addresses from which your computer can  
receive RIPL code.  
Notes:  
1. Some applications may require that IP addresses contain leading zeroes for  
numbers less than 100. For example, 129.132.4.20 may need to be entered as  
123.132.004.020.  
If any of the addresses is incomplete or contains a number other than 0 to 255, an  
error message is displayed when you select the Save icon. To clear this error,  
change the improper address and select Save again.  
Note: You should save a copy of your changes in case you need to replace your  
battery.  
3-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Ping icon allows you to confirm that a specified address is valid by sending a  
test transmission to that address.  
After choosing the Ping option, you may be asked to indicate which communications  
adapter (Token Ring or Ethernet) should be used to send the test transmission.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Config icon allows you to configure network adapters which require setup.  
Selecting the Config icon presents a list of the adapters requiring configuration. Use  
the arrow keys to highlight an adapter, press the spacebar to select the adapter, then  
highlight the OK icon and press the Enter key.  
The next screen allows you to select the configuration of the adapter you have just  
chosen (or allow the system to select the configuration automatically). As on the  
previous screen, use the arrow keys to highlight, press the space bar to select, then  
highlight the OK icon and press enter.  
3-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI ID  
This selection allows you to view and change the addresses (IDs) of the SCSI  
controllers attached to your system unit. To change an ID, highlight the entry by  
moving the arrow keys, then use the space bar to scroll through the available ID's.  
After you have entered the new address, use the arrow keys to highlight the Save  
icon and press the Enter key.  
At any time in this process, you can select the Default icon to change the SCSI IDs  
to the default values.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Update  
This selection allows you to update the service processor and system firmware in  
your system unit from an image on a 3.5 inch diskette. After choosing to update the  
firmware and confirming this choice, you must insert the diskette containing the  
firmware image.  
ATTENTION: While the new firmware image is being copied into your system unit,  
you must not turn off the system unit. Turning off the system unit during the  
update process may render your system unit inoperable.  
After the flash update is complete, the system unit restarts.  
If the flash update does not complete successfully or the system unit does not restart  
after the flash update, contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative.  
3-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Firmware Recovery  
If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the firmware information in your  
system unit has been corrupted, then you must perform a firmware recovery.  
To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:  
1. Locate your firmware update diskette.  
2. Using another system unit, rename the  
*.img ,br file on the firmware update diskette to  
precover.img  
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.  
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.  
5. Turn on your system unit.  
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the 1 key if the system console is  
an ASCII terminal, or the F1 key if the system console is a directly-attached  
keyboard.  
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a  
Firmware Update as described above.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Text-Based System Management Services  
The text-based Open Firmware command line and System Management Services are  
available if an ASCII terminal is attached to your system unit. The text-based Open  
Firmware command line allows you to configure some adapters, and the System  
Management Services makes it possible for you to view information about your  
system unit and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing device  
configurations.  
To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the 8 key after the  
keyboard text symbol appears during startup.  
If you have pressed the 8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK" prompt)  
appears after the initialization and power-on self tests (POST) are complete.  
The Open Firmware command line can be used to set up adapters that are not  
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation  
directs you to use this option if it is needed.  
To exit from the Open Firmware command enter reset-all or power the system  
down and reboot.  
To start the text-based System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware  
command line, press 1 on the ASCII terminal keyboard when the keyboard text  
symbol appears during startup.  
3-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the text-based System Management Services starts, the following screen  
appears.  
à
ð
System Management Services  
1. Display Configuration  
2. Multiboot  
3. Utilities  
4. Select Language  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
====>  
á
ñ
Selecting the numbered options provide capabilities described on the following  
pages.  
After you have finished using the text-based System Management Services, entering  
x (for exit) boots your computer.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Configuration  
This option provides information about the setup of your computer. A screen similar  
to the following is displayed.  
à
ð
Device  
PowerPC 6ð4  
L2-Cache, ð512K  
Memory  
slotA=8MB  
slotB=8MB  
LPT  
addr=3BC  
COM  
addr=3F8  
COM  
addr=2F8  
Audio  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Diskette  
addr=3Fð  
Integrated Ethernet  
addr=8ððð5AF67BD  
SCSI cntlr id=7  
PCI Adapters  
.-----------. .-----------.  
|P=prev-page| |N=next-page|  
-----------' -----------'  
.------.  
|x=Exit|  
------'  
á
ñ
Note that this configuration information does not include ISA adapters installed in the  
system unit.  
3-26 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MultiBoot Menu  
à
ð
Multiboot Menu  
1. Select Software  
2. Software Default  
3. Install From  
4. Select Boot Devices  
5. OK Prompt  
6. Mulitboot Startup <OFF> (or <ON>)  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
The Select Software option, if supported by the operating system, shows the names  
of the operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating  
systems.  
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a message saying that:  
No Operating System Installed  
this would mean that information in non-volatile storage could have been lost, as  
would happen if the battery had been removed. In order to recreate this value issue  
the bootlist command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location of  
the operating system in a particular Hard disk. Please see the explanation of the  
bootlist command in your AIX documentation.  
The Software Default option, if supported by the operating system, lets you select the  
default operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by  
all operating systems.  
The Install From option produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, where  
the operating system is installed from. You select one of the devices and the system  
searches the device for an operating system to install and if supported by the  
operating system in that device, the name of the operating system displays.  
The Select Boot Device option provides a list of devices that can be selected to be  
stored on the boot list. Up to 5 devices are supported.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The OK Prompt procvides access to the Open Firmware command prompt. The  
Open Firmware command prompt is used for debug purposes, and device driver  
development. Information about the commands that are available in the IEEE  
Standard 1275.  
The Multiboot Start option toggles between OFF and ON and selects if the Multiboot  
menu invokes automatically on startup or not.  
Select Boot Devices  
This selection enables you to view and change the custom boot list, which is the  
sequence of devices read at startup time.  
à
ð
Select Boot Devices  
1. Display Current Settings  
2. Restore Default Settings  
3. Configure 1st Boot Device  
4. Configure 2nd Boot Device  
5. Configure 3rd Boot Device  
6. Configure 4th Boot Device  
7. Configure 5th Boot Device  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
====>  
á
ñ
Selecting the Display Current Settings option lists the current order of devices in the  
boot list. The following screen shows an example of this display.  
3-28 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
à
ð
Current Boot Sequence  
1. Diskette  
2. Ethernet (Integrated)  
3. SCSI CD-ROM  
4. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk  
5. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk  
id=3  
id=6  
id=5  
(slot=1)  
(slot=1)  
(slot=5)  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting any of the Configure Boot Device options displays the following screen.  
à
ð
Configure Nth Boot Device  
Device Number  
Current Position  
Device Name  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
-
Diskette  
Ethernet  
SCSI CD-ROM  
SCSI 4.5GB Hard Disk  
.-----------. .-----------.  
|P=prev-page| |N=next-page|  
-----------' -----------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
3-30 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities  
The Utilities screen enables you to select from the following system management  
tools.  
à
ð
Utilities  
1. Set Password and Unattended Start Mode  
2. Audio <ON>  
3. Display Error Log  
4. Remote Initial Program Load Setup  
5. Change SCSI id  
6. Update System Firmware  
7. Update Service Processor  
8. Select Console  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Set Password and Unattended Start Mode: Entering this selection permits  
access to the following options.  
à
ð
Password Utilities  
1. Set Power On Password  
2. Remove Power On Password  
3. Unattended Start Mode <OFF>  
4. Set Privileged-Access Password  
5. Remove Privileged-Access Password  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Power On Password: Setting a power-on password helps protect information  
stored in your computer. You can use any combination of up to eight characters  
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. The password you type is not displayed on  
the screen. Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the  
password again for verification.  
If you previously had set a power-on password and wanted to remove it, select  
Remove Power-On Password.  
Note: If you forget your password, you have to shut down the computer and  
remove the battery for at least 30 seconds to disable the password. See  
Appendix B, “Replacing the Battery” on page B-1 for details.  
A password can be set only after the system is turned off and on again.  
3-32 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects against  
the unauthorized starting of the system programs.  
If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select  
Remove Privileged-Access Password.  
Note: If you forget your password, you have to shut down the computer and  
remove the battery for at least 30 seconds to disable the password. See  
Appendix B, “Replacing the Battery” on page B-1 for details.  
Audio: Selecting this utility turns on or off the system tones heard at power-on  
time.  
Remote Initial Program Load Setup: This option allows you to enable and set  
up the remote startup capability of your computer. First, you are asked to specify the  
network parameters.  
à
ð
Network Parameters  
1. IP Parameters  
2. Adapter Parameters  
3. Ping  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Note: Some applications may require that IP addresses contain leading zeroes for  
numbers less than 100. For example, 129.132.4.20 may need to be entered as  
123.132.004.020.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the IP Parameters option displays the following screen.  
à
ð
IP Parameters  
1. Client IP Address  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð  
ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð  
ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð  
ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Selecting the Adapter Parameters option allows you to view an adapter's hardware  
address as well as configure network adapters that require setup.  
à
ð
Adapter Parameters  
Device  
HW Address  
1. 3Com,3C9ð5  
2. Token-Ring  
8ððð5AFC67BD  
8ððð32E54A12  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
á
ñ
3-34 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting option 1 (3Com,3C905) displays the following 100Mb Ethernet  
configuration menus:  
à
ð
ñ
3Com Etherlink Fast XL  
1. Media Type  
2. Full Duplex  
[Auto]  
[Auto]  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
á
Selecting the Media Type option allows you the change the media employed by the  
Ethernet adapter:  
à
ð
.----------------.  
| MEDIA TYPE  
| 1. 1ð BaseT  
|
|
| 2. 1ðð Base TX |  
| 3. Auto  
----------------'  
|
á
ñ
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Full Duplex option allows you to change how the Ethernet adapter  
communicates with the network:  
à
ð
.----------------.  
| Full Duplex  
| 1. Yes  
|
|
|
|
| 2. No  
| 3. Auto  
----------------'  
á
ñ
Ping, the last option available from the Network Parameters menu, allows you to test  
a connection to a remote system unit. After selecting the Ping option, you must  
choose which adapter communicates with the remote system.  
à
ð
Interface  
1. Ethernet (Integrated)  
2. Token Ring (Slot=3)  
===>  
á
ñ
3-36 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After choosing which adapter to use to ping the remote system, you must provide the  
addresses needed to communicate with the remote system.  
à
ð
Ping  
1. Client IP Address  
129.132.4.2ð  
129.132.4.1ð  
129.132.4.3ð  
255.255.255.ð  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
.---------.  
|E=Execute|  
---------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
===>  
á
ñ
Display Error Log: A screen similar to the following is displayed when you select  
this option. Here, you can view or clear your computer's error log.  
à
ð
.----------------------------------------------------------.  
|
|
|
Error Log  
|
|
Date  
Time  
12:13:22  
ErrorCode  
25A8ðð11  
Location |  
| Entry 1. 96/ð4/ð1  
ðð-ðð  
|
|
| Entry 2. no error logged  
----------------------------------------------------------'  
.-----------------.  
|C=Clear Error Log|  
-----------------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
------'  
á
ñ
Change SCSI ID: This option allows you to view and change the addresses of the  
SCSI controllers attached to you computer.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Update System Firmware: This option allows you to update your system  
firmware. Note that you must insert a diskette containing the firmware update image  
after you see the following confirmation screen.  
à
ð
.--------------------------------------------------------------.  
| This selection will update your System Firmware. Do you want |  
| to continue? Press Y(Yes) N(No).  
|
--------------------------------------------------------------'  
á
ñ
Firmware Recovery: If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the firmware  
information in your system unit has been corrupted, then you must perform a  
firmware recovery.  
To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:  
1. Locate your firmware update diskette.  
2. Using another system unit, rename the  
*.img  
file on the firmware update diskette to  
precover.img  
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.  
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.  
5. Turn on your system unit.  
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the 1 key on the system console  
ASCII terminal.  
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a  
System Firmware Update as described above.  
Select Console: Selecting this option allows you to define which display is used  
by the system for system management.  
3-38 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select Language  
This option allows you to change the language used by the text-based System  
Management Services screens.  
à
ð
SELECT LANGUAGE  
1. English  
2. Francais  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italiano  
5. Espanol  
6. Svenska  
====>  
.------.  
|x=Exit|  
------'  
á
ñ
Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to  
properly display languages other than English.  
Chapter 3. System Management Services 3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-40 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus  
The Service Processor menus enable you to configure Service Processor options  
and to enamle and disable functions.  
Service Processor menus are available using an ASCII terminal when the server is  
powered off and the Service Processor is operating with standby power. Service  
Processor menus are also available when server power is on and the Service  
Processor has detected a server problem (such as loss of surveillance).  
During the first power up (i.e. power cord is plugged into the outlet), Service  
Processor menus are not available for 45 seconds while the Service Processor is  
running self-tests and initializing the server. If the server powers down, Service  
Processor menus become available after 15 seconds.  
For a summary of the Service Processor functions and the methods for invoking  
them, see the table on page 4-2.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Functions  
Service  
Processor  
Menus  
Service  
Processor  
Service  
SMS  
(ASCII or  
graphics  
terminals)  
(ASCII  
Aids  
terminals)  
(ASCII or  
graphics  
terminals)  
Read VPD  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y3  
View System Environmental Conditions  
Read System POST Errors  
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
View Progress Indicators from last Boot  
Power-on System  
Power-off System  
Read NVRAM  
Reset Service Processor  
Setup Reboot/Restart Policy  
Start Talk Mode  
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring  
Select Modem Line Speed  
Enable/Disable Modem  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Setup Modem Configuration  
Setup Ring Indicate Power-On  
Setup Dial-out Phone Numbers  
Setup Surveillance  
Update Service Processor Flash EPROM  
Change General Access Password  
Change Privileged Access Password  
Select Language  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode  
1
2
3
Operating system root password  
Privileged access password  
General access (power-on) password  
4-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Menus  
The Service Processor menus are divided into two groups:  
Ÿ General user menus - the user must know the general access password.  
Ÿ Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged access password.  
The following section describes these two groups of menus, how to access them,  
and the functions associated with each option.  
When the server is powered down, the Service Processor menus may be accessed  
locally or remotely.  
Menu Inactivity  
To prevent loss of control in unstable power environments, the Service Processor  
leaves the menu mode after 5 minutes of inactivity. Menus may be resumed by  
pressing any key on the terminal, local or remote.  
How to access Service Processor menus locally  
Service Processor menus may be accessed locally by connecting an ASCII terminal  
to either serial port. Because the presence of the ASCII terminal cannot be  
confirmed by the Service Processor, you must press a key on the ASCII terminal to  
confirm its presence. Next the Service Processor prompts you for a password (if  
set), and when verified, displays the Service Processor menus.  
How to access Service Processor menus remotely  
Service Processor menus may be accessed remotely by connecting a modem to  
serial port 1 or serial port 2.  
Ÿ Power off the server, unplug the power cord, and press the power button to drain  
capacitance while power is disconnected.  
Ÿ Connect the modem to the appropriate serial port and turn the modem on.  
Ÿ Plug in the server.  
Note: If your modem has not been configured, go to “CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP  
MENU” on page 4-16.  
With a terminal or terminal emulator, call the server's modem. The Service  
Processor prompts you for a password (if set), and when verified, displays the  
Service Processor menus.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General User Menus  
The menu options presented to the General user are a subset of the options  
available to the Privileged user. The user must know the General Access Password  
in order to access these menus.  
à
ð
GENERAL USER MENU  
1. Power-On System  
2. Read VPD  
3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
4. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
5. Read System POST Errors  
6. View System Environmental Conditions  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Ÿ Power-On System  
Allows the user to power-on the system.  
Ÿ Read VPD  
Displays manufacturer vital product data, such as serial numbers, part numbers,  
etc.  
4-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,  
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical  
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.  
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line  
are the progress indicators from the boot that produced the current sessions.  
Below the dashed line are progress indicators from the boot preceding the one  
that produced the current sessions.  
The progress indication codes are chronological from bottom to top. The dashed  
line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.  
Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs  
Displays the Service Processor error logs.  
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available  
and are able to time stamp with local time. See 4-35 for an example of the error  
log.  
Ÿ Read System POST Errors  
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).  
Your server may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is  
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this  
error log when used with the diagnostics helps to isolate faults. See 4-36 for an  
example of the POST error screen.  
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions  
On selection of this menu, the Service Processor reads all environmental  
sensors and reports the results to the user. This option maybe useful when  
surveillance fails, as it allows the user to determine the environmental conditions  
that may be related to the failure. See 4-14 for an example of the System  
Environmental Conditions screen.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Privileged User Menus  
The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the  
Privileged Access Password in order to access these menus.  
MAIN MENU  
At the top of the MAIN Menu is a listing containing:  
Ÿ Your Service Processor's current firmware version  
Ÿ The firmware copyright notice  
Ÿ The System Name given to your server during setup  
You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the  
functions of your service processor.  
The System Name, an optional field, is the name your server reports in problem  
messages. This name helps your support team, (for example, your system  
administrator, network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly  
identify the location, configuration, and history of your server. The System Name is  
set from the Main Menu using option 6.  
4-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the Main  
Menu example that follows is example information only.  
à
ð
Service Processor Firmware  
EPROM: 1997ð915  
FLASH: 1997ð512  
Copyright 1997, IBM Corporation  
SYSTEM NAME  
MAIN MENU  
1. Service Processor Setup Menu  
2. System Power Control Menu  
3. System Information Menu  
4. Language Selection Menu  
5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
6. Set System Name  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor SETUP MENU  
à
ð
Service Processor SETUP MENU  
1. Change Privileged Access Password  
2. Change General Access Password  
3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Start Talk Mode  
5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
6. Reset Service Processor  
7. Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Note  
Unless otherwise stated in menu responses settings become effective when a  
menu is exited using option 98 or 99.  
4-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passwords  
Passwords can be any combination of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. You can  
enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first 8  
characters. Passwords can be set from the Service Processor menu or from the  
SMS menus.  
For security purposes, the Service Processor counts the number of attempts to enter  
correct passwords. The results of not recognizing a correct password within this  
error threshold are different, depending on whether the attempts are being made  
locally (at the server) or remotely (via a modem). The error threshold is 3.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the  
Service Processor exits the menus. This action is taken based on the assumption  
that the server is in an adequately secure location with only authorized users having  
access. Such users must still successfully enter a login password to access AIX.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the  
Service Processor disconnects the modem to prevent potential security attacks on  
the server by unauthorized remote users.  
The following illustrates what you can access with the Privileged Access Password  
and the General Access Password.  
Privileged  
Access  
General  
Access  
Resulting Menu  
Password  
Password  
None  
None  
Set  
None  
Set  
MAIN MENU displayed  
MAIN MENU displayed  
None  
User's with password see the MAIN MENU  
Others users see the GENERAL USER MENU  
Set  
Set  
Users see menus associated with the entered password  
Ÿ Change Privileged Access Password  
Set or change the Privileged Access Password. It provides the user with the  
capability to access all Service Processor functions. This password is usually  
used by the system administrator or root user.  
Ÿ Change General Access Password  
Set or change the General Access Password. It provides limited access to  
Service Processor menus, and is usually available to all users who are allowed  
to power-on the server.  
Ÿ Enable/Disable Console Mirroring  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When Console Mirroring is enabled, the Service Processor sends information to  
both serial ports. This capability may be enabled by local or remote users. This  
provides local users the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console mirroring  
may be enabled for the current session only. For more information, see “Console  
Mirroring” on page 4-32.  
Ÿ Start Talk Mode  
In a console mirroring session, it is useful for those that are monitoring the  
session to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting this menu item  
activates the keyboards and displays for such communications while console  
mirroring is established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is  
possible. Alternating messages between users works best.  
4-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Surveillance Setup Menu  
This option may be used to setup operating system surveillance.  
à
ð
ñ
OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
1. Surveillance:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Surveillance Time Interval:  
Currently 5  
3. Surveillance Delay:  
Currently 1ð  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
Surveillance  
May be set to Enabled or Disabled.  
Surveillance Time Interval:  
May be set to any number from 2 to 255 minutes.  
Surveillance Delay:  
May be set to any number from 0 to 255 minutes.  
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page 4-29 for  
more information about surveillance.  
Ÿ Reset Service Processor - Allows the user to reinitialize the Service Processor.  
Ÿ Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM - This is an automatic process.  
An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the  
Internet or from your service team. The Internet address is:  
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro  
The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should  
format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.  
Reformatting is worth the time and effort. When this process is selected, you are  
prompted to place the diskette into the drive and to indicate to the system that  
the diskette in available and the automatic process starts. If the system has other  
needs, you are prompted. See “Service Processor Firmware Updates” on  
page 4-33 for additional information and update methods.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU  
à
ð
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU  
1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
4. Power-On System  
5. Power-Off System  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Ÿ Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode  
This option may be used to instruct Service Processor to immediately power-on  
the server after a power failure, bypassing power-on password verification.  
Unattended Start Mode can also be set via SMS Menus. It is intended to be  
used on servers that require automatic power-on after a power failure.  
Ÿ Ring Indicator Power-On Menu  
Ring Indicate Power-On is an alternate method of dialing in, without establishing  
a Service Processor session. If the system is powered off, Ring Indicate  
Power-On is enabled, the server is powered on at the predetermined number of  
rings, If the server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone  
call is not answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server  
powered-on. The Ring Indicator Power-On Menu and defaults are shown  
below:  
à
ð
Ring Indicator Power-On Menu  
1. Ring Indicate Power-On :  
Currently Disabled  
2. Number of Rings :  
Currently 6  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
4-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Ring Indicate Power-On may be set to 'Enabled' or 'Disabled'.  
– Number of Rings may be set to any number from 1 to 255.  
Ÿ Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu, see “Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu”  
on page 4-23.  
Ÿ Power-on System  
Lets you power-on the system immediately. For other power-on methods see  
“System Power-On Methods” on page 4-26.  
Ÿ Power-off System  
Allows the user to power-off the server following a surveillance failure.  
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU  
à
ð
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU  
1. Read VPD  
2. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
4. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
5. Read System POST Errors  
6. Read NVRAM  
7. View System Environmental Conditions  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Ÿ Read VPD  
Displays manufacturer's vital product data, such as serial numbers, part  
numbers, etc.  
Ÿ Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
Displays the VPD information that was in effect after the last system boot. This  
information will usually be identical with the results from the menu selection  
"Read VPD," but in the case of configuration updates or certain faults, this  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
historical comparison can be useful to System Administrators and service  
personnel.  
Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,  
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical  
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.  
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line  
are the progress indicators from the boot that produced the current sessions.  
Below the dashed line are progress indicators from the boot preceding the one  
that produced the current sessions.  
The progress indication codes are chronological from bottom to top. The dashed  
line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.  
Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs  
Displays error conditions detected by the Service Processor.  
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available  
and are able to time stamp with local time. See 4-35 for an example of the error  
log.  
Ÿ Read System POST Errors  
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).  
Your server may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is  
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this  
error log when used with the diagnostics helps to isolate faults. See 4-36 for an  
example of the POST error screen.  
Ÿ Read NVRAM  
Displays Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) content.  
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions  
The Service Processor reads all environmental sensors and reports the results to  
the user. This option is most useful when surveillance fails, as it allows the user  
to determine the environmental conditions that may be related to the failure.  
The following is an example of system environment conditions:  
4-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
à
á
ð
ñ
System Environmental Conditions  
(System Power is currently off.)  
Fan ð: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 1: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 2: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 3: A stopped fan detected  
MEM Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
I/O Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
CPU Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
5.ð Volts: A low 5.ð Voltage reading detected  
3.3 Volts: A low 3.3 Voltage reading detected  
5.ð Standby Volts: is operating within normal tolerance  
+12.ð Volts: A low +12.ð voltage reading detected  
-12.ð Volts: A high -12.ð voltage reading detected  
(Press Return to Continue)  
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU  
à
ð
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU  
1. English  
2. Francais  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italiano  
5. Espanol  
6. Svenska  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to  
properly display languages other than English.  
This menu allows selecting languages into which Service Processor and system  
firmware menus and messages are displayed.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU  
à
ð
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU  
1. Modem Configuration Menu  
2. Serial Port Selection Menu  
3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
4. Telephone Number Setup Menu  
5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
6. Customer Account Setup Menu  
7. Call-Out Test  
8. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
á
ñ
Ÿ Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu.”  
Ÿ Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 4-17.  
Ÿ Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on  
page 4-18.  
Ÿ Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page 4-20.  
Ÿ Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on  
page 4-22.  
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On Menu, see on page 4-12.  
Modem Configuration Menu  
The first two lines of the Modem Configuration Menu are status lines showing the  
current selections. Selections are made in the two section labeled Modem Ports and  
Modem Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you that you want to  
activate and then select the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. If  
you wish to set up both serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a  
time.  
4-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem  
Configuration Files” on page D-1 and “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on  
page D-6.  
à
ð
Modem Configuration Menu  
Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:  
Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:  
To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file  
name  
Modem Ports:  
1. Serial port 1  
2. Serial port 2  
Modem Configuration File Name:  
3. modem_f_sp  
4. modem_fð_sp  
5. modem_f1_sp  
6. modem_z_sp  
7. modem_zð_sp  
8. none  
9. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
ð
Serial Port Selection Menu  
à
Serial Port Selection Menu  
1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may enable and/or disable the call-in and call-out functions of each serial port in  
any combination.  
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
à
ð
ñ
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
1. Serial Port 1 Speed:  
Currently 96ðð  
2. Serial Port 2 Speed:  
Currently 96ðð  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
Serial port speed can be set for terminal performance or to accommodate modem  
capabilities. A speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. Valid serial port  
speeds are shown below:  
50  
600  
4800  
75  
1200  
1800  
2000  
2400  
3600  
7200  
9600  
19200  
38000  
57600  
115200  
110  
134  
150  
300  
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
This menu may be used to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a  
system failure. The Service Processor allows setting or changing telephone numbers  
for:  
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number: - The telephone number of the maintenance  
provider's computer.  
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number: - The telephone number of  
the local system support provider's computer.  
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number: The number for a pager carried by someone  
who will respond to problem calls from your server.  
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number: - The telephone number service personnel  
will use to reach the system user.  
Ÿ Customer System Telephone Number: - The telephone number to which the  
server's modem is connected.  
4-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
à
ð
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
1. Service Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
5. Customer System Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center  
computer. The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from  
servers with call-out capability. This computer is referred to as "the catcher."  
The catcher expects messages in a specific format to which Service Processor  
conforms. For more information about the format and catcher computers, refer  
to the README file in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact your  
service provider for the correct telephone number to enter here. Until you have  
that number, leave this field blank.  
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the  
System Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls  
from servers. Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone  
number to enter here. Until you have that number, leave this field blank.  
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a pager carried by  
someone who will respond to problem calls from your server. Contact your  
administration center representative for the correct telephone number to enter  
here. For test purposes, enter your telephone number here. You can change it  
later when testing is complete.  
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging  
function. Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error  
message when they do not get the expected response from another  
modem. Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error  
message will cause the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place  
pager calls for the number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup  
Menu. These retries result in redundant pages.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For digital pagers that require a personal Identification Number (PIN) for access,  
include the PIN in this field as in the following example:  
1 8ðð 123 4567,,,,87654  
where the commas create pauses1 for the voice response system, and the  
87654 represents the PIN.  
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near  
the server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the  
telephone number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, enter your  
telephone number here. You can change it after testing is completed.  
Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your  
server's modem is connected. The service or administration center  
representatives need this number to make direct contact with your server for  
problem investigation. This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
à
ð
CALL-OUT POLICY SETUP MENU  
1. Call-Out policy (First/All):  
Currently First  
2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):  
Currently 12ð  
3. Remote latency, (in seconds):  
Currently 2  
4. Number of retries:  
Currently 2  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
Ÿ Call Out policy may be set to 'first' or 'all'. If call out policy is set to 'first', the  
Service Processor will stop at the first successful call out to one of the following  
numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Admin Center  
3. Pager  
1
The length of these pauses is set in modem register S8. The default is usually 1 or 2 seconds each.  
4-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If call out policy is set to 'all', the Service Processor will attempt a call out to all  
the following numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Admin Center  
3. Pager  
Remote timeout and Remote latency are functions of your service provider's  
catcher computer. You should take the defaults or contact your service provider  
for recommended settings.  
Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that  
resulted in busy signals or other error messages.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Account Setup Menu  
à
ð
ñ
Customer Account Setup Menu  
1. Customer Account Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer RETAIN Login UserID:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Customer RETAIN Login Password:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
Ÿ Customer Account Number is assigned by your service provider for record  
keeping and billing. If you have an account number, enter it here. Otherwise,  
leave this field blank.  
Ÿ Customer RETAIN Login UserID and Customer RETAIN Login Password  
apply to a service function to which your service provider may or may not have  
access. Leave these fields blank if your service provider does not use RETAIN.  
4-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,  
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the  
operating system process.  
Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware  
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
à
ð
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
1. Number of reboot attempts:  
Currently 3  
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?  
Currently Yes  
3. Enable supplemental restart policy?  
Currently No  
4. Call-Out before restart:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
á
ñ
Ÿ Number of reboot attempts if the server fails to successfully complete the boot  
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal  
to or greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboots attempts count, not  
reboots that occur after a restart attempt. At restart, the counter is set to 0.  
Ÿ Use OS-Defined restart policy lets the Service Processor react or not react the  
same as the operating system to major system faults, by reading the setting of  
the operating system parameter Automatically Restart/Reboot After a System  
Crash. This parameter may, or may not be defined depending on the operating  
system or its version/level. If the operating system automatic restart setting is  
defined, then it may be set to respond to a major fault by restarting or by not  
restarting. See your operating system documentation for details on setting up  
operating systems automatic restarts. The default value is YES.  
Ÿ Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is NO. If set to YES,  
the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as  
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:  
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO  
OR  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system  
has NO automatic restart policy.  
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 4-27.  
Ÿ Call-Out before restart (Enabled/Disabled) If a restart is necessary due to a  
system fault, you can enable the Service Processor to call out and report the  
event. This item is valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive,  
signalling a bigger problem.  
Service Processor Functions and Features  
The following section discusses some of the Service Processor functions and  
features more fully.  
The IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series supports the following functions:  
Built-in Functions  
Initialization and Test  
Error Data Collection  
Service Processor Basic  
Instructions Test (BIST)  
JTAG System Chip  
Initialization  
BIST/POST errors and status  
Checkstop FIR data logout  
Machine check logout  
CPU Complex validation  
VPD Collection  
Configuration  
System Management  
Reset and Reboot on System  
Firmware fail  
Reboot on system failure  
4-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Local User Function  
User Interface  
Local async console  
Text based menus with NLS  
Operator Panel messages  
Power On/Off  
Power and Miscellaneous  
Status and Data Access  
Configurable Reboot Policy  
VPD  
Error data (Service Processor)  
Error data (system)  
Environmental data  
Passwords  
Service Processor Setup  
Utilities  
Phone numbers  
Language (NLS) selection  
Call In/Call Out enable/disable  
Flash (Gold/Recovery block)  
Update  
Flash (Composite block)  
Update  
System Name  
Modem Configuration  
Boot failure  
Remote User Functions  
Call Out (Call Home)  
Reporting  
OS Termination  
Surveillance failure  
Critical EPOW reporting  
Checkstop  
Machine check  
Indentify system by name  
Call In  
Power-on via ring-indicate  
Password/security check  
Console mirroring/Quick  
disconnect  
Application Interface Functions  
Monitor/Sense  
Thermal/Voltage/fan speed  
SP Flash Update(Recovery  
and Composite)  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Power-On Methods  
Ÿ Power-on Switch - see “Starting the System Unit” on page 2-1.  
Ÿ SP Menu power-on request  
You can request a power-on via the Service Processor menus from either a local  
or remote terminal.  
If a remote terminal is to be used, the modem must be connected to serial port  
1, and the operating system set up to enable a TTY login session on that port.  
Refer to “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on page D-6 for information  
on transferring modem sessions from Service Processor to the operating system.  
Ÿ Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on  
page 4-12.  
The Service Processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of AC power  
(see Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER  
CONTROL MENU). When AC power is restored, the system returns to the then  
current power state at the time AC loss occurred. For example, if the system  
was powered-on when AC loss occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is  
restored. If the system was powered-off when AC loss occurred, it remains off  
when power is restored.  
Ÿ Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.  
Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can  
operate a timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set  
the timer so that your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down.  
The timer is battery operated, so power interruptions occurring while the server is  
off do not affect its accuracy. Refer to the shutdown -t command of AIX for  
details on setting the timer.  
Because of the potential for AC power loss, the Timed Power-On function of AIX  
can only be assured when Unattended Power-On Mode is enabled. If a Timed  
Power-On event occurs during an AC power loss, and if Unattended Power-On  
Mode is enabled, the system starts when AC power is restored.  
If Unattended Start Mode is disabled (the default), the system power state  
remains off when AC power is restored, regardless of the power state of the  
system when AC loss occurred.  
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On  
Enabling ring indicate power-on disables remote call-in. If ring indicate power-on  
is enabled, the server will power on at a predetermined number of rings. If the  
server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not  
answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server powered on.  
4-26 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt  
The Service Processor will initiate a power-on sequence upon detection of a  
failed boot attempt.  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery  
Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,  
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the  
operating system process.  
Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware  
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
Failure During Boot Process: During the boot process, either initially after  
system power-on or upon reboot after a system failure, the Service Processor (SP)  
monitors the boot progress (via surveillance). If progress stops, the Service  
Processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The Service  
Processor can re-attempt this process according to an entry on the Reboot/Restart  
Policy Setup Menu.  
Failure During Normal System Operation: When the boot process completes  
and control transferers to the operating system (OS), the Service Processor can  
monitor operating system activity (see the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU  
item Set Surveillance Parameters). If OS activity stops, the Service Processor can  
initiate a reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see OS  
documentation).  
If the operating system is AIX, the menu item under SMIT for setting the restart  
policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash (True/False), and the default is False.  
When the setting is True, and if the SP parameter, Use OS-Defined Restart Policy, is  
Yes (the default), the Service Processor takes over for AIX to reboot/restart after a  
Check Stop or Surveillance failure.  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls: The operating system's  
automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation) indicates the OS  
response to a system crash. The SP can be instructed to refer to that policy, or not,  
by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy menu item.  
If the operating system has no automatic restart policy, or if it is disabled, then the  
Service Processor restart policy can be controlled from the Service Processor Menus  
by using the Enable Supplemental Restart Policy selection.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use OS-Defined restart policy?: The Use OS-Defined restart policy default  
setting is YES. This causes the SP to refer to the OS Automatic Restart Policy  
setting and take action, the same action the OS would take if it could have  
responded to the problem causing the restart.  
When this setting is NO, or if the OS did not set a policy, the Service Processor  
refers to Enable supplemental restart policy for its action.  
Enable Supplemental Restart Policy?: The default setting is NO. If set to  
YES, the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as  
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:  
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO  
OR  
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system has  
NO automatic restart policy.  
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 4-27.  
The following provides a more thorough understanding of the relations among the  
OS and Service Processor restart controls:  
OS Automatic  
reboot/restart  
after crash setting  
SP to use  
OS-Defined  
restart policy?  
SP Enable  
supplemental  
restart policy?  
System response  
None  
None  
None  
None  
False²  
False²  
False²  
False²  
True  
No  
No  
Yes±  
Yes±  
No  
No±  
Yes  
No±  
Yes  
No±  
Yes  
No±  
Yes  
No±  
Yes  
No±  
Yes  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
No  
Yes±  
Yes±  
No  
No  
Yes±  
Yes±  
True  
True  
True  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
1
2
Service Processor default  
AIX default  
4-28 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance  
Surveillance is a function in which the Service Processor monitors the system, and  
the system monitors the Service Processor. This monitoring is accomplished by  
periodic samplings called heartbeats.  
Surveillance is available during two phases:  
1. System firmware bringup (automatic) and  
2. Operating system runtime (optional).  
System Firmware Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means  
to detect boot failures while the system firmware is running.  
System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It  
cannot be disabled via a user selectable option.  
If the Service Processor detects no heartbeats during system IPL (for 7 minutes), it  
cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries is set  
from the Service Processor menus. If the fail condition repeats, the Service  
Processor leaves the machine powered on, logs an error and offers menus to the  
user. If Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure and  
displays the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.  
Operating System Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means  
to detect hang conditions, hardware or software failures while the operating system is  
running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect the Service  
Processor failure by the lack of a return heartbeat.  
Operating system surveillance is disabled by default. This is to allow the user to run  
operating systems that do not support this Service Processor option.  
Operating system surveillance can be enabled and disabled via:  
Ÿ service processor Menus  
Ÿ service processor Service Aids  
Three parameters must be set for operating system surveillance:  
1. Surveillance enable/disable  
2. Surveillance interval  
This is the maximum time in minutes the Service Processor should wait for a  
heartbeat from the operating system before timeout.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Surveillance delay  
This is the length of time in minutes for the Service Processor to wait from when  
the operating system is started to when the first heartbeat is expected.  
Surveillance will take effect immediately after setting the parameters from the Service  
Processor menus.  
If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control  
to the operating system), and the Service Processor does not detect any heartbeats  
from the operating system, the Service Processor assumes the system is hung. The  
machine is left powered on and the Service Processor enters standby phase,  
displaying the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel. If  
Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure.  
4-30 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Out (Call-Home)  
The Service Processor can call out (Call-Home) when it detects one of the following  
conditions:  
Ÿ System firmware surveillance failure.  
Ÿ Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by Operating System).  
Ÿ Critical environmental failures.  
Ÿ Restarts  
To enable the call out feature, you need to do the following:  
Ÿ Have a modem connected to serial port 1 or 2.  
Ÿ Set up the following using the Service Processor Menus or Diagnostic Service  
Aids:  
– Enable call out for the serial port where the modem is connected.  
– Set up serial port line speed.  
– Enter the modem configuration filename.  
– Set up site specific parameters (i.e. phone numbers for call out,  
call out policy, etc).  
Ÿ To call out before restart, set “Call-Out before restart” to ENABLED from the  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.  
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging  
function. Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error  
message when they do not get the expected response from another modem.  
Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error message will  
cause the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the  
number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup Menu. These retries  
result in redundant pages.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Console Mirroring  
Console mirroring allows a person on a local ASCII terminal to monitor the Service  
Processor activities of a remote user. Console mirroring ends when the Service  
Processor releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.  
System Configuration:  
Ÿ Service Processor  
Ÿ Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls  
Ÿ Local ASCII terminal connected to the other serial port. This local terminal may  
be connected directly to your server or connected through another modem.  
There are two scenarios in which console mirroring can be invoked:  
1. Remote session first, then local session added  
a. Remote session already in progress.  
b. Remote user uses the Service Processor menus to enable console mirroring,  
allowing both consoles to be active.  
2. Local session first, then remote session added  
a. Local session is already in progress.  
b. The Service Processor receives a call from the remote user.  
c. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The Service  
Processor immediately begins mirroring Service Processor menus.  
Note: A quick disconnect is accomplished by hitting the key sequence Ctrl+D on  
either console. Both sessions will exit the Service Processor menus.  
4-32 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Firmware Updates  
The Service Processor EPROM may need to be updated for two different reasons:  
1. The UPDATE (composite) portion of the EPROM has become corrupted.  
2. The Service Processor firmware upgrades, without any corruption present.  
The use of a Flash EPROM allows updates to occur without physically replacing the  
memory.  
The firmware in your server can be updated using one of four available initiation  
processes:  
1. Service Processor initiation  
2. SMS Utilities initiation  
3. Service Aids initiation  
4. AIX initiation.  
Each initiation method is described below. In each case, the process prompts you  
for your authority and shows the contents of the update media. Verify the file with  
which to perform the update, and follow any other instructions that may appear.  
After initiation, the processes are identical and automatic.  
There are two areas in each firmware module that may need updating:  
1. The gold code or base code or EPROM area  
2. The custom or main program or FLASH area  
Each update file contains matching gold and custom firmware, so it is not possible to  
update to a conflicting set.  
Before the update process begins, the versions of each of the two areas of the target  
firmware module are compared to the versions on the update diskette. Only the  
area(s) that need updating are updated. In most cases, only the custom area is  
updated.  
An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the Internet  
or from your service team. The Internet address is:  
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro  
The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should  
format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.  
Reformatting is worth the time and effort.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Refer to the downloaded update instructions, or to the System Management Services  
“Config” on page 3-5 or “Display Configuration” on page 3-26 or Service Processor  
menus on page 4-7, to determine the level of the system unit or service processor  
flash.  
Updating Firmware from the Service Processor Menus: The Service Processor Menus  
are available while the server is powered off. From the Service Processor Main  
Menu, select Service Processor Setup to bring up a menu containing the item,  
Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM. Selecting that item starts the update  
process. The process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the  
first diskette and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the  
process requires user assistance, it is requested.  
Updating Firmware from the SMS Utilities: From a powered down or reset condition,  
bring up the SMS Utilities and select the menu item for updating firmware. The  
process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the first diskette  
and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the process  
requires user assistance, it is requested.  
Updating Firmware from the Service Aids  
Note: This service aid is only supported for Online Diagnostics.: This service aid  
allows you to update the system or service processor flash.  
Additional update and recovery instructions may be provided; also you need to know  
the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file. If the flash  
update image file is on a diskette, you need the AIX DOS utilities package to process  
the diskette. You can use the dosdir command to find out the name of the update  
image file. This service aid uses the dosread command to put the file into the /var  
file system.  
Using this service aid to update the system or service processor flash will not save  
the current contents of the flash.  
The flash image file will be copied in the /var file system. If there is not enough  
space in the /var file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If  
this occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file system and retry the  
service aid. After the file is copied, a warning screen will ask for confirmation to  
continue the flash update. Continuing the flash update will eventually cause the  
system to reboot and return to the AIX login prompt. After the system unit reboots,  
the file /var/update_flash_image can be removed to conserve space in the /var file  
system.  
4-34 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updating Firmware from AIX  
You must delete the file /var/update_flash_image before proceeding.  
The flash update image file must have already been placed in the /var file system.  
This could have been done with a file transfer from another server or with the  
dosread command of the AIX DOS Utilities, for example. With the flash update  
image in place, issuing the following AIX command  
shutdown -u /var/ᑍfilenameᑍ.img  
initiates the update process. Where *filename* is the name of the flash update  
image. During the process, the server powers down and reboots. You know the  
process is complete when the login prompt reappears.  
Service Processor Logs  
Service Processor Error Log: The Service Processor error logs contain error  
conditions detected by the Service Processor.  
à
ð
Error Log  
1997ð626223337 ð. Loss of Redundant Fan #5  
4ð21ðð91  
Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue. >  
á
ñ
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available and  
are able to time stamp with local time.  
Chapter 4. Service Processor Menus 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System POST Errors: If POST (Power-On Self Test) errors occur during  
start-up, this error log help isolate faults when used with the diagnostics.  
à
ð
Read System POST Errors  
Version : ð  
Severity : ð  
Disposition : ð  
Initiator : ð  
Event being reported : ð  
Extended Error Log Data:  
ðxC2 ðxðð ðx84 ðxð9 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð  
ðx2ð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðx72 ðx74  
ðx63 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð  
ðxðð ðxðð ðx28 ðxð3 ðxðð ðxð5 ðxðð ðxð1  
ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð  
ðx49 ðx42 ðx4D ðxðð ðx55 ðx3ð ðx2E ðx31  
ðx2D ðx5ð ðx31 ðx2D ðx58 ðx31 ðxðð  
(Press Return to Continue)  
á
ñ
4-36 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options  
This chapter provides instructions to help you add options to your system. Some  
option-removal instructions are provided, in case you need to remove one option to  
install another. If you have several internal options to install, these instructions  
enable you to add them all at one time.  
Safety Considerations  
Observe the following safety precautions any time you work with this system unit.  
DANGER  
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous  
voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the  
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet  
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent and electrical shock.  
Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power  
cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.  
When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,  
ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before  
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power  
cables from the existing system before you add a device.  
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables  
to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different  
electrical potentials.  
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations ,  
printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.  
CAUTION:  
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's  
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid  
electrical shock.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DANGER  
To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from  
the electrical outlet before relocating the system.  
5-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices  
Attention: Adapters, planars, diskette drives, and disk drives are sensitive to static  
electricity discharge. These devices are wrapped in antistatic bags, as shown in this  
illustration, to prevent this damage.  
Take the following precautions:  
Ÿ If you have an antistatic wrist strap available, use it while handling the device.  
Ÿ Do not remove the device from the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the  
device in the system unit.  
Ÿ With the device still in its antistatic bag, touch it to a metal frame of the system.  
Ÿ Grasp cards and boards by the edges. Hold drives by the frame. Avoid touching  
the solder joints or pins.  
Ÿ If you need to lay the device down while it is out of the antistatic bag, lay it on  
the antistatic bag. Before picking it up again, touch the antistatic bag and the  
metal frame of the system unit at the same time.  
Ÿ Handle the devices carefully in order to prevent permanent damage.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Expansion Bays  
Your system comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette drive and a SCSI CD-ROM  
drive. The number of preinstalled disk drives in your system varies according to the  
model you ordered.  
Diskette Drive: The 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette drive uses 1MB, and 2MB  
diskettes.  
Open Bays: Your system's special design gives you the flexibility to use up to  
eighteen 3.5-inch disk drives. There are two additional open spaces in the top  
left bay for additional media devices. For installation instructions and information  
on the types of drives that you can install in each bay, see “Installing Internal  
Drives” on page 5-41.  
Disk Drive: All models come with one or more integrated SCSI-2 disk drives.  
The capacity of the disk drives varies, depending on your configuration.  
5-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input/Output Connectors  
Parallel Connector:  
One 25-pin parallel port is provided.  
Serial Connectors: Three 9-pin serial connectors (1, 2, and 3) are provided. If you are  
using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable.  
Mouse Connector: This is where the mouse cable connects to the system. This connector  
sometimes is called an auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.  
Keyboard Connector: The cable from your keyboard connects here.  
Ethernet Connector:  
The cable from your Ethernet LAN connects here.  
External SCSI Connector: The cable from your external SCSI bus connects here.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Front Covers Only  
Note: If you are removing or installing hot-swap drives, only the front covers need  
to be removed. Other options may require removal of both the front and side covers  
as described in “Removing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
1. Open the door.  
5-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Remove the door by carefully lifting it up and off the hinges. Store it in a safe  
place.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Remove the front cover:  
a. Unlock the keylock on the front cover.  
b. Lift up on the latch on the left side of the front cover.  
5-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Grasp the sides of the front cover at the top of the system and pull it forward.  
(The front cover is held in place by two spring detented ball studs.)  
d. Detach the front cover's bottom hooks from the grooves located on the  
bottom of the system, and lift the front cover off the bottom of the system.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Both the Front and Side Covers  
Note: If you previously removed the front covers, go to Step 3.  
1. Open the door.  
5-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Remove the door by carefully lifting it up and off the hinges. Store it in a safe  
place.  
3. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, tapes) from the drives.  
4. Shutdown the operating system.  
5. Turn off power to the system and all attached options.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the system, disconnect the  
telephone line.  
7. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets.  
Note the location of the following; then disconnect them from the back of the  
system:  
Ÿ Power cord  
Ÿ Display cable  
Ÿ Keyboard cable  
Ÿ Any other cables and cords  
The back of your system looks similar to the following.  
5-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Remove the front cover:  
a. Unlock the keylock on the front cover.  
b. Lift up on the latch on the left side of the front cover.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Grasp the sides of the front cover near the top of the system and pull it  
forward. (The front cover is held in place by two spring detented ball studs.)  
d. Detach the front cover's bottom hooks from the grooves located on the  
bottom of the system, and lift the front cover off the bottom of the system.  
5-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Remove the side cover:  
a. Pivot the side cover 90° away from the front of the system.  
b. Remove the cover by carefully lifting it up and off the hinges. Store it in a  
safe place.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the I/O Planar Cover  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Loosen the three screws (2 turns) on the I/O planar cover and unlatch the cover.  
Attention If your system has the SSA bulkhead cable installed, make sure that  
you do not damage the cable as you remove the I/O planar cover.  
3. Remove the I/O planar cover.  
5-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option List  
Ÿ Installing Memory Adapter Card. Go to page “Installing Memory” on page 5-18.  
Ÿ Installing Memory–Module Kits — Go to page 5-24.  
Ÿ Removing Memory–Module Kits — Go to page 5-28.  
Ÿ Installing Adapters — Go to page 5-30.  
Ÿ Removing Adapters — Go to page 5-34.  
Ÿ Upgrading the CPU card — Go to page 5-37.  
Ÿ Installing Internal Drives — Go to page 5-41.  
Ÿ Installing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive or CD-ROM in Bay A or Bay B — Go to page  
5-44.  
Ÿ Installing a SCSI Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E — Go to page 5-51.  
Ÿ Installing a SSA Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E — Go to page 5-55.  
Ÿ Installing a SCSI Backplane in Bank D or E — Go to page 5-59.  
Ÿ Installing a SSA Backplane in Bank D or E — Go to page 5-66.  
Ÿ Removing an Internal Drive — Go to page 5-81.  
Ÿ Removing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive or CD-ROM from Bay A or Bay B — Go to  
page 5-82.  
Ÿ Removing a SCSI Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E — Go to page 5-83.  
Ÿ Removing a SSA Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E — Go to page 5-87.  
Ÿ Installing a U-Bolt — Go to page 5-91.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Memory  
The memory in your system is installed on memory cards, you can have up to two  
memory cards installed. The memory DIMMs are installed in identical matched pairs,  
that is, they must be installed across from each other. For example, if you have a  
memory DIMM installed in J1 you must have an identical memory DIMM installed in  
J2. In order for you to add or remove memory to or from an existing memory card,  
you must remove the memory adapter card from the system.  
5-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Memory card 1 is the bottom card if there are two cards installed. If you only  
have one memory card, it is memory card 1.  
Ÿ For information on installing or adding memory adapter cards, see “Installing or  
Adding Memory Adapter Cards” on page 5-20.  
Ÿ For information on removing memory adapter cards, see “Removing Memory  
Adapter Cards” on page 5-22.  
Ÿ For information on installing memory modules, see “Memory-Modules” on  
page 5-24.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing or Adding Memory Adapter Cards  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-16; then return here to determine your next step.  
3. Remove the memory card shield positioned over the bottom memory card.  
4. Open the retainer hooks.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and  
close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
5. Remove the connector cover that is over the unused memory card slot.  
6. Place the memory card in the card guide rails.  
7. Make sure that the black tabs on the new card are captured by the retainer  
hooks.  
8. Align the card with the connector.  
9. Close the retainer hooks to set the card.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and  
close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
5-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Reinstall the memory shield on the bottom memory card.  
.
11. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
12. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the I/O planar cover  
as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover” on page 5-101; then return  
here to determine your next step.  
13. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Memory Adapter Cards  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-16; then return here to determine your next step.  
3. Remove the memory adapter card shield.  
4. The card is secured in place with card retainer hooks, one on each end of the  
card. Open the card retainer hooks and remove the card.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and  
close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
5-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If you are installing a memory adapter card, see “Installing or Adding Memory  
Adapter Cards” on page 5-20.  
6. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
7. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the I/O planar cover  
as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover” on page 5-101; then return  
here to determine your next step.  
8. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory-Modules  
You can increase the amount of memory in your system by installing  
memory-modules on to an existing memory adapter card or if your system has only  
one adapter card installed that is fully populated, you can add an additional memory  
adapter card. Your system uses 200-pin, dual inline Error Correcting Code (ECC)  
memory modules (DIMMs) to increase system memory.  
You install memory-modules into connectors on the memory card located inside the  
system. The memory card holds up to 8 pairs of memory-modules and your system  
can have 2 memory cards installed. You can install up to 3GB of addressable ECC  
memory. The memory-modules sizes available for your system are 32MB, and  
128MB.  
Attention: Memory modules must be installed in identical pairs.  
Attention: Memory modules are sensitive to static electricity discharge. These  
devices are wrapped in antistatic bags,to prevent this damage. See page 5-3 for  
information on handling Static-Sensitive Devices.  
Ÿ If you are adding additional memory or replacing memory to an existing memory  
adapter card, see “Adding or Replacing Memory to an Existing Card” on  
page 5-25.  
Ÿ If you are adding memory to a new memory adapter card, see step 2 on  
page 5-25.  
5-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding or Replacing Memory to an Existing Card  
1. Remove the memory adapter card, see “Removing Memory Adapter Cards” on  
page 5-22  
2. Locate the memory module connectors and determine which module you want to  
add or remove. If you are removing memory modules, see “Removing Memory”  
on page 5-28; then return here if you are replacing memory.  
3. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static  
electrical charges, and then pick up a memory-modules.  
4. Install the memory module.  
Note: Memory modules must be installed in identical pairs (size and speed).  
New memory modules must be installed in the first available pair of vacant  
connectors, starting at pair 1 (connectors J1 and J2) and progressing to pair 8  
(connectors J15 and J16). Refer to the previous figure.  
a. The memory modules are keyed so that they can only be inserted one way.  
Align the memory module notches with the keys in the memory-modules  
connectors.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Insert the memory module into the next unused memory module connector.  
Ensure that the tabs are in the unlocked position, as shown, prior to memory  
module insertion. After insertion, the tabs should be in the locked position  
(up).  
Attention: Inserting the memory-modules diagonally may damage the  
memory-modules.  
5. Go to “Device Records” on page A-2 to record the size of the memory-modules  
and the connector into which it is installed; then return here to determine your  
next step.  
6. Replace the memory card, see “Installing or Adding Memory Adapter Cards” on  
page 5-20.  
7. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
5-26 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the I/O planar cover  
as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover” on page 5-101; then return  
here to determine your next step.  
9. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Memory  
1. Remove the memory adapter card, see “Removing Memory Adapter Cards” on  
page 5-22.  
2. Locate the memory module connectors and determine which memory modules  
you want to remove.  
3. Remove the memory modules by pushing the tabs out on the memory  
connectors as shown.  
4. Store any memory modules you are no longer using in a static-protective  
package. Make a note of the kit size and speed for future reference.  
5-28 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ic  
t
Sta  
Devices  
5. Replace the memory card, see “Installing or Adding Memory Adapter Cards” on  
page 5-20.  
6. If you are not installing memory modules in the empty connectors, go to “Device  
Records” on page A-2 to update the memory information; then return here to  
determine your next step.  
7. If you are installing memory modules in the empty connectors, go to “Adding or  
Replacing Memory to an Existing Card” on page 5-25.  
8. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the I/O planar cover  
as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover” on page 5-101; then return  
here to determine your next step.  
9. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
10. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Adapters  
Adding an adapter, such as audio, communication, or specialized graphics, extends  
the capabilities and power of your system. Your system has nine expansion slots for  
connecting adapters. The expansion slots are numbered on the back of the system  
as shown below. You can install ISA and PCI adapters.  
Memory adapters cannot be installed in your system because it does not support  
channel memory.  
5-30 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-16; then return here to determine your next step.  
3. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter. Check the  
instructions that came with the adapter for any requirements or restrictions. If  
there are no restrictions, you can use any empty slot that matches your adapter  
type (PCI, or ISA).  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover:  
a. Loosen and remove the screw with a screwdriver.  
b. Slide the expansion-slot cover out of the system.  
c. Store the expansion-slot cover in a safe place for future use.  
d. Save the screw for use in securing the adapter.  
5-32 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Install the adapter:  
a. Carefully grasp the adapter and align the adapter with the expansion slot  
connector.  
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.  
c. Install and tighten the expansion-slot screw you removed earlier.  
6. Install any cables that are required for the adapter.  
7. Replace the I/O planar cover as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-101; then return here to determine your next step.  
8. Go to “Device Records” on page A-2 and write the adapter name next to the slot  
into which it is installed; then return here to determine your next step.  
9. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
10. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Adapters  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10  
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-16; then return here to determine your next step.  
3. Remove any cables that are attached to the adapter.  
4. Remove the adapter:  
a. Note the slot number of the adapter you are removing.  
b. If there are any cables attached to the adapter, disconnect them.  
c. Remove the screw for the adapter.  
5-34 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d. Carefully pull the adapter out of the system.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If you are not installing another adapter in this expansion slot, reinstall the  
expansion-slot cover:  
a. Slide the cover over the open expansion slot.  
b. Install the screw and tighten with a screwdriver.  
c. If the adapter removed had cables that are no longer required, you may want  
to remove them.  
6. Replace the I/O planar cover as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-101; then return here to determine your next step.  
7. Go to “Device Records” on page A-2 and delete the name of the adapter you  
removed; then return here to determine your next step.  
8. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
9. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
5-36 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading or Adding a CPU Card  
You may find media included with your new CPU card. Look at the label to  
determine the minimum level of firmware required for the new CPU card.  
Attention: If your system has two CPU cards, do not mix different speed CPU cards  
in your system.  
1. Check the Service Processor firmware level (see Chapter 4, “Service Processor  
Menus” on page 4-1).  
2. Update the Service Processor firmware if necessary (see Chapter 4, “Service  
Processor Menus” on page 4-1).  
3. When the system reboot is complete, shut the system down.  
4. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
5. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-16; then return here to determine your next step.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If you are upgrading a CPU card, remove the installed CPU card:  
a. Remove the power cable from the CPU card by squeezing the tabs.  
b. The card is secured in place with card retainer hooks, one on each end of  
the card. Open the card retainer hooks and remove the card.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open  
and close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
c. Place the new CPU card in the card guide rails.  
d. Make sure that the black tabs on the new card are captured by the retainer  
hooks.  
e. Align the card with the connectors.  
f. Close the retainer hooks to set the card.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open  
and close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
g. Connect the power cable to the CPU card.  
7. If you are adding a CPU card:  
a. Remove the power cable from the existing CPU card by squeezing the tabs.  
5-38 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Open the retainer hooks on the unused CPU card slot.  
c. Remove the connector cover from the unused CPU card slot.  
d. Place the new CPU card in the card guide rails.  
e. Make sure that the black tabs on the new card are captured by the retainer  
hooks.  
f. Align the card with the connectors.  
g. Close the retainer hooks to set the card.  
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open  
and close the retainer hooks at the same time.  
h. Connect the power cable to each of the CPU cards.  
i. Ensure that the power cables come out vertically from the power supply and  
that they are pushed back and out of the way so that the I/O planar cover  
can be installed.  
8. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
9. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the I/O planar cover  
as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover” on page 5-101; then return  
here to determine your next step.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
11. Restart the system and go to the system management services to check the  
system firmware level.  
Ÿ If you have a graphical monitor, go to “Graphical System Management  
Services” on page 3-1.  
Ÿ If you have a tty monitor, go to “Text-Based System Management Services”  
on page 3-24.  
The version level has the letters 'wil' and five numbers in it. The numbers  
represent the year and the day of the year the firmware was created (yyddd),  
where ddd is the julian day that the firmware was created.  
12. If the firmware level already installed on your system is an earlier level than is  
indicated on the system firmware media included with your new CPU card,  
update the system firmware.  
13. Restart the system.  
5-40 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Internal Drives  
If you add different types of drives, your system can read multiple types of media  
and store more data. Several types of drives are available , such as:  
Ÿ Diskette  
Ÿ Disk drive  
Ÿ CD-ROM  
Ÿ Tape  
Note: If you are installing a CD-ROM drive, refer to xiii before installing the drive.  
Internal drives are installed in bays. A diskette drive is preinstalled in bay A2 and a  
CD-ROM drive is preinstalled in bay A1 in all models. You can install a media drive  
in bay B1 or B2.  
The base system has a hot-swap backplane installed in bank C. You can install six  
hot-swappable disk drives into the bays in bank C. You can order additional  
hot-swap backplanes for banks D and E. Banks C, D, and E each contain six bays.  
You can install up to six disk drives in bank C, bank D, or bank E.  
You can order an optional feature that lets you install non hot-swappable disk drives  
into bays B1 and B2.  
Note: The bank letter-designations are located on both vertical rails on the front of  
the system. The bay-slot numbers are located on the top of bank C and the  
bottom of bank E.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Considerations  
Bay A comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44MB diskette drive in A2 and a CD-ROM in A1.  
Bay B supports two 5.25-inch, or 3.5 inch half-high, removable-media devices.  
Bay B also supports a disk drive in a special carrier when bays C, D, and E are  
configured with SSA disk drives or SCSI RAID disk drives.  
You cannot install hot-swappable drives in bays A or B.  
Banks C, D, and E can accommodate six slim-high drives or three half-high drives, or  
a combination of both drive sizes. If you use a combination, remember that one  
half-high drive uses the equivalent space of two slim-high drives.  
Your system supports eighteen 3.5-inch, slim-high (1.0 inch), disk drives or nine  
3.5-inch, half-high (1.6 inch) disk drives in the bottom three banks (C, D, and E) or a  
combination of slim and half-high drives.  
Before installing disk drives in bank D and E, you must order disk drive backplanes  
for bank D and E. Depending on your configuration, you may need to order and  
install up to two additional SCSI-2 adapters. The internal Ultra SCSI option is  
supported in backplanes C, D, and E and requires one Ultra SCSI adapter per bank.  
The internal Serial Storage Architecture (SSA) option is supported in backplanes C,  
D, and E and requires one SSA adapter that supports all three banks. To order,  
contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative.)  
Hot Swap Drives  
The hot-swap backplane contains logic that allows you to remove disk drives without  
turning off system power. The base system has a hot-swap backplane installed in  
bank C. You can install six hot-swappable disk drives into the bays in bank C. You  
can order additional hot-swap backplanes for banks D and E. Banks C, D, and E  
each contain six bays. You can install up to six disk drives in bank C, bank D, or  
bank E.  
Attention: Proper procedures must be followed whenever you remove a disk drive.  
Hot swap capability is available only with hot swap backplanes, and hot swap  
carriers for the disk drive.  
5-42 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preinstallation Steps (All Bays)  
Note: All internal drives in this system are mounted vertically.  
Attention: Caution should be used when handling all hard drives. Drives are more  
likely to be damaged during installation and service. Bumping or handling drives  
roughly causes latent failures. Don't stack drives and always use appropriate ESD  
practices. A drop of as little as a 1/4 inch can cause latent failures. Media can take  
30 seconds to spin down, so ensure at least a 30 second delay before switching off  
the hot-swappable drives for removal.  
1. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal  
surface on the system; then remove the drive from the bag.  
Sta  
t
ic  
Devices  
2. Check the instructions that came with the drive to see if you need to set any  
switches or jumpers on the drive, or if you need to attach a tray to the drive.  
Notes:  
Ÿ Automatic SCSI ID setting applies only to hot-swappable disk drives.  
Therefore, if you install a SCSI media drive (in bay B), you must set a  
SCSI ID for that drive. See Table A-2 on page A-4 in Appendix A for  
SCSI IDs.  
Ÿ Remove the terminator from the media drive you plan to install in bay  
B. The cable that connects to bays A and B already has a terminator.  
3. Choose the location in which you want to install the drive.  
Ÿ To install a disk drive, tape drive, or CD-ROM in bay A or Bay B, go to page  
5-44.  
Ÿ To install a drive in bank C, D, or E, go to page 5-51.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive, or CD-ROM in Bay A or Bay B  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Each device you install in bay B must have a tray like that shown below. If your  
drive came with a different tray, remove it and install the correct tray. (Your  
system has extra tray's in the bay.)  
3.5-inch drive  
5.25-inch device  
3. When installing a boot disk in Bay B1 or Bay B2 install the disk drive into the  
disk carrier.  
5-44 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Ultra Boot Disk  
4. You must also install the two gaskets that are shipped with the disk carrier if they  
were not previously installed. Make sure the gaskets are installed as shown  
behind the front lip. One gasket goes above the mounting hole and one gasket  
goes below the mounting hole.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Connect the 16-bit to 8-bit interposer that came with your SCSI device to the  
drive.  
6. Check and place SCSI ID jumpers in correct position on the drive for correct ID.  
See Table A-2 on page A-4 for SCSI ID addresses.  
5-46 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Install the device:  
a. Position the device vertically, with the connectors facing the rear of the  
system.  
b. Align the device with the guides on the bottom of the bay and slide it to the  
rear of the bay until it stops.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Slide the diskette drive and the CD-ROM drive forward in their guides to allow  
more room for connecting cables to the new drive.  
a. Connect the cables:  
1) If you are installing a SCSI drive, locate an unused SCSI drive connector  
at the back of the bay. Connect the SCSI drive connector to the drive.  
2) Connect the power cable connector to the 4-pin connector on the drive.  
3) The following illustration shows the possible cable connectors and  
routing for backplane C and the media devices in bay A and bay B. The  
diskette, CD-ROM and backplane C are factory installed.  
5-48 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Cable connections for connecting the integrated SCSI on the system  
board to backplane C.  
Attention Route the cables (SCSI-2 and power) at the rear of the  
media drives so they do not block airflow or bind between the fans  
and media drives.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. If you installed a removable-media drive in bay B1 or bay B2, remove the cover  
plate from the front cover. A cover plate (complete bezel) is in place in the  
system's front cover, which you removed earlier. Remove the cover plate by  
pushing it, gently, out of the front cover.  
Note: If a disk drive is installed into Bay B1 or Bay B2 the removable bezel  
should not be removed.  
10. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 to record the drive location (diskette interface  
devices do not require a SCSI ID); then return here to determine your next step.  
11. If you have other drives to install, go to page 5-43.  
12. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
13. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
5-50 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a SCSI Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E.  
Notes:  
Ÿ SCSI IDs are automatically assigned by the backplane for each bank.  
Therefore, no address jumpers are required on the drives.  
Ÿ 1.6 inch half-high (9.1 GB) drives require two bays for each drive.  
Ÿ SCSI disk drives and SSA disk drives are not interchangeable.  
Ÿ Before installing disk drives in bank D, you must also order:  
– A disk drive backplane for bank D.  
Ÿ Before installing disk drives in bank E, you must also order and install:  
– A disk drive backplane for bank E  
– A SCSI PCI adapter that drives Bank E.  
– A SCSI cable that connects the SCSI PCI adapter to Bank E.  
To order, contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative.  
Ÿ After the backplane is completely installed, you do not have to turn off the  
system to install additional hot-swappable disk drives. However, you  
must turn off the system when performing the steps that involve installing  
or removing backplanes, cables, adapters, memory, and CPU cards.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the front covers as described in  
“Removing the Front Covers Only” on page 5-6  
2. Each drive you plan to install in bank C, D, or E must have the hot-swap SCSI  
disk drive carrier attached.  
Note: SCSI disk drives carriers have a white plastic bezel around the status  
lights of the carrier. SSA disk carriers have a black bezel.  
Attention: Handle the disk drive with care as it is very fragile and can be easily  
damaged if exposed to shock, electrostatic discharge, or rough handling.  
3. It is recommended that you install the disk drive in the next unused position of  
bank C, D, or E.  
Attention: Attaching SCSI address jumpers on the drive rather than using the  
automatic ID furnished by the backplane is not advised. Attaching jumpers can  
cause service problems, multiple drives at the same address, or confusion  
locating the correct drive.  
a. Rotate the carrier latch to the open position.  
b. Position the drive carrier assembly vertically, with the connector facing the  
rear of the system.  
5-52 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Align the side of the carrier with the raised guides on the bottom of the bay.  
d. Slide the carrier into the bay gently to keep from damaging the disk drive. Slide  
the carrier to the rear of the bay until it stops.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Move the carrier latch to the locked position. If the carrier will not lock, check  
that the drive carrier is fully seated in the backplane. When the drive carrier  
is fully seated and power is turned on, the green LED on the drive carrier will  
illuminate.  
4. See “Disk Drive Status LED States” on page 2-18 for information on disk drive  
lights.  
5. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 to record the drive location for the drive; then  
return here to determine your next step.  
6. If you have other drives to install, go to page 5-43.  
7. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
8. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing the Front Covers” on page 5-93.  
5-54 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a SSA Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E.  
Notes:  
Ÿ Banks C, D, and E support hot-swappable disk drives only.  
Ÿ SSA disk drive carriers and SCSI disk drive carriers are not  
interchangeable.  
Ÿ 9.1 GB drives (1.6 inches high) require two bays for each drive.  
Ÿ Before installing disk drives in bank D or E, you must also order and  
install a disk drive backplane at the rear of bank D or E. You must also  
order and install an SSA adapter and an SSA cable that connects the  
disk drive backplane to the SSA adapters. (To order, contact your  
authorized reseller or marketing representative.)  
Ÿ After the backplane is completely installed, you do not have to turn off the  
server to install additional hot-swappable disk drives. However, you must  
turn off the system when performing the steps that involve installing or  
removing backplanes, cables, adapters, memory, and CPU cards  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the front covers as described in  
“Removing the Front Covers Only” on page 5-6  
2. If you are installing drives in bank D or E for the first time, you must install an  
additional backplane before you can install drives. See “Installing a SSA  
Backplane in Bank D, or E” on page 5-66 for information on how to install the  
backplane.  
3. Each drive you plan to install in bank C, D, or E must have the hot-swap SSA  
disk drive carrier attached.  
Note: SSA disk drives carriers have a black plastic bezel around the status  
lights of the carrier. SCSI disk carriers have a white bezel.  
Attention: Handle the disk drive with care as it is very fragile and can be easily  
damaged if exposed to shock, electrostatic discharge, or rough handling.  
4. A minimum of two SSA disk drives are required when populating individual banks  
C, D, or E. They must be located in bays 1 and 5 prior to installing additional  
disk drives in the next unused position of banks C, D, or E.  
Attention: SSA backplanes must be fully populated. Each backplane connector  
must have a disk drive or a blank carrier installed at all times. If you are installing  
a disk drive in a bay that was not previously utilized, you must remove the blank  
carrier prior to installing the disk drive.  
a. Rotate the carrier latch to the open position.  
b. Position the drive carrier assembly vertically, with the connector facing the  
rear of the server.  
5-56 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Align the side of the carrier with the raised guides on the bottom of the bay.  
d. Slide the carrier into the bay gently to keep from damaging the disk drive. Slide  
the carrier to the rear of the bay until it stops.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Move the carrier latch to the locked position. If the carrier does not lock,  
check that the drive carrier is fully seated in the backplane. When the drive  
carrier is fully seated and power is turned on, the Ready LED on the drive  
carrier illuminates.  
5. See “Disk Drive Status LED States” on page 2-18 for information on disk drive  
lights.  
6. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 to record the drive location for the drive; then  
return here to determine your next step.  
7. If you have other drives to install, go to page 5-43.  
8. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
9. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing the Front Covers” on page 5-93.  
5-58 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a SCSI Backplane in Bank D or E  
Notes:  
Ÿ Before installing SCSI disk drives in bank D or E, you must also order  
and install:  
– A SCSI disk drive backplane for bank D or E  
To order, contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative.  
Ÿ After the backplane is completely installed, you do not have to turn off the  
system to install additional hot-swappable disk drives. However, you  
must turn off the system when performing the steps that involve installing  
or removing backplanes, cables, adapters, memory, and CPU cards  
1. Inventory your parts and tools.  
a. backplane  
b. power cable  
c. one screw (with backplane)  
d. SCSI-2 adapter  
e. SCSI-2 cable  
f. Long flat blade screwdriver  
2. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
3. Locate the new backplane (D or E).  
4. Check the jumpers on the new backplane for proper setting. The jumpers should  
be set as shown.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Install the backplane at the rear of bank D or E:  
a. Align the top screw hole on the left side of the backplane with the top screw  
hole on the left side of bank D, making sure the dimples on the backplane  
line up with the holes on the frame of the system.  
b. Secure the backplane with one screw.  
5-60 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Install an additional SCSI-2 adapter or RAID adapter (if necessary) in one of the  
empty PCI expansion slots. Refer to “Installing Adapters” on page 5-30 for  
installation instructions; then continue to the next step.  
7. Attach cables to backplane D or E.  
a. When installing a hot swap backplane, connect the connector from the  
EPOW cable to backplane D or E as shown.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Attach the new power cable to backplane D or E.  
c. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power supply.  
d. After the connection have been made, neatly place the cables into the power  
supply side tray.  
e. Locate the SCSI cable.  
f. Before connecting the SCSI cable, fill in your SCSI cable labels. Fill in the  
bank identifier (D or E) and the adapter slot (such as 1P, 2P, 3P). Refer to  
the following illustration to help you label your cable properly.  
5-62 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g. Connect the SCSI cable from the second SCSI internal connector to the new  
backplane (D or E). Refer to the following illustrations to help you connect  
the cables properly.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Fill in the bank label. The bank label is located in the front of the system at the  
right side of the machine. Use the following table to help you determine the  
proper numbers to enter on the label.  
Physical Slot of SCSI Adapter  
Bank Label  
30 - 78  
30 - 70  
30 - 68  
30 - 60  
10 - 78  
10 - 70  
10 - 68  
20 - 60  
20 - 58  
30 - 58  
10 - 60  
9I/P  
8I/P  
7P  
6P  
5P  
4P  
3P  
2P  
1P  
Second Integrated SCSI Controller  
First Integrated SCSI Controller  
5-64 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. If you have other drives to install, go to page 5-43.  
10. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
11. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a SSA Backplane in Bank D, or E  
Notes:  
Ÿ Banks C, D, and E support hot-swappable drives only.  
Ÿ Before installing SSA disk drives in bank C, you must use FC3006 to  
move the SCSI ultra boot disk drive to the media bay.  
Ÿ Before installing SSA disk drives in bank C, D, or E, you must also order  
and install a SSA disk drive backplane at the rear of bank D or E. You  
must order and install a SSA adapter. To order, contact your authorized  
reseller or marketing representative.  
Ÿ After the backplane is completely installed, you do not have to turn off the  
server to install additional hot-swappable drives. However, you must turn  
off the system when performing the steps that involve installing or  
removing backplanes, cables, adapters, memory, and CPU cards  
5-66 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Inventory your parts and tools.  
a. SSA backplane  
b. power cable  
c. SSA daisy chain cable (only needed if more than one SSA backplane is  
installed)  
d. one screw (with backplane)  
e. SSA adapter  
f. SSA cables  
g. SSA bulkhead connectors with cables  
h. SSA documentation  
i. Long flat blade screwdriver  
j. Three cable retainers.  
2. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
3. Install the SSA adapter, see “Installing Adapters” on page 5-30.  
4. Replace the I/O planar cover as described in “Replacing the I/O Planar Cover”  
on page 5-101; then return here to determine your next step.  
5. If you are installing a backplane in bank D, go to step 6 on page 5-68. If you are  
installing a backplane in bank E, go to step 16 on page 5-75.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Locate the new backplane.  
7. Attach the new power cable to backplane D.  
8. Locate the SSA bulkhead cable or internal SSA cable.  
5-68 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Connect the SSA cable to the new backplane. Refer to the following illustrations  
to help you connect the cables properly.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Connect the connector from the EPOW cable to backplane D as shown.  
5-70 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Install the backplane at the rear of bank D:  
a. Align the top screw hole on the left side of the backplane with the top screw  
hole on the left side of bank D, making sure the dimples on the backplane  
line up with the holes on the frame of the server.  
b. Secure the backplane with one screw.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power supply.  
5-72 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. If you are using an internal SSA cable, connect the SSA cable to the SSA  
adapter. Refer to the PCI SSA 4-Port RAID Adapter Installation Guide for  
information on connecting the SSA cable to the SSA adapter. The cable should  
be routed up and placed in the cable holders under the top of the system and  
routed through the top cable exit hole beside the fan assembly. Continue with  
step 14 on page 5-74.  
13. If you are using the external SSA bulkhead cable:  
a. Remove the bulkhead plate at the rear of the system.  
b. Attach the SSA bulkhead cable to the inside rear of the system using the two  
screws that you removed from the plate.  
c. Apply the three cable retainers as shown in the illustration.  
Attention: The cable retainers must be applied with the clamp opening  
towards the I/O planar cover against the inside lip away from the I/O planar  
cover, as shown.  
d. Place the SSA bulkhead cables into the three retainers.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Attach the SSA cables from the SSA adapter to the SSA bulkhead  
connectors, as show. Refer to the SSA documentation for information on  
connecting these cables.  
14. Backplane D installation is complete.  
15. If you are installing a backplane E, continue with step 16 on page 5-75,  
otherwise continue with step 26 on page 5-80.  
5-74 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. Remove the outside SSA cable from Backplane D, this cable is attached later in  
these procedures. One end of the SSA daisy chain cable connects here.  
17. Locate the new backplane.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Attach the new power cable to backplane E.  
19. Attach the SSA daisy chain cable to the connector on Backplane D.  
20. If the other end is not attached to the inside SSA connector on Backplane E.  
21. Connect the connector from the EPOW cable to backplane E as shown.  
5-76 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22. Install the backplane at the rear of bank E:  
a. Align the top screw hole on the left side of the backplane with the top screw  
hole on the left side of bank D, making sure the dimples on the backplane  
line up with the holes on the frame of the server.  
b. Secure the backplane with one screw.  
23. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power supply.  
5-78 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24. Connect the SSA cables that were removed from backplane D to the outside  
SSA connector on backplane E.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25. SSA cables connected to SSA backplanes C, D, and E is shown below.  
26. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
27. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
5-80 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing Internal Drives  
Where are you removing the drive?  
Ÿ To remove a disk drive, tape drive, or CD-ROM from bay A or bay B, go to page  
5-82.  
Ÿ To remove a drive from bank C, D, or E, go to page 5-83.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a Disk Drive, Tape Drive, or CD-ROM from Bay A or Bay B  
Note: To locate bay A or bay B, see the illustration given on page 5-81.  
To remove a drive from bay A or bay B, do the following steps:  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Locate the drive you want to remove.  
3. Slide the drive halfway out of the front of the bay.  
4. Disconnect the cables from the back of the drive.  
5. Remove the drive from the bay. Store the drive in a safe place.  
6. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 and update the drive information; then return here  
to determine your next step.  
7. If you are removing another internal drive from bay A or bay B, return to step 2.  
8. If you are installing another internal drive in bay A or bay B, go to step “Installing  
a Disk Drive, Tape Drive, or CD-ROM in Bay A or Bay B” on page 5-44.  
9. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
10. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96.  
5-82 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a SCSI Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E  
Notes:  
Ÿ To locate banks C, D, and E, see the illustration given on page 5-81.  
Ÿ You do not have to turn off the system to remove a hot-swappable drive  
from banks C, D, and E.  
The lights on the disk drive provide status of the drives. See “Disk Drive Status LED  
States” on page 2-18 for a definition of the disk drive status.  
Attention:  
An application procedure unique to your operating system must be followed which  
logically removes the drive from the system and spins it down. If you remove a  
drive while it is in use, your system may lose valuable data.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove a hot swap drive from bank C, D, or E, do the following steps:  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
the Front Covers Only” on page 5-6.  
2. Locate the drive you want to remove.  
3. Ensure that you have selected the correct drive.  
4. Press the spin down button on the drive carrier to remove power from the drive.  
The green LED should flash.  
5. Unlock the drive by turning the carrier latch 90 degrees clockwise to the open  
position.  
5-84 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Disconnect the drive from the connector on the backplane, by grasping the  
handle on the drive tray and carefully pulling the drive out of the system. Store  
the drive in a safe place.  
Attention: Handle the disk drive with care as it is very fragile and can be easily  
damaged if exposed to shock, ESD, or rough handling.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. If you are removing another internal drive, return to step 2 on page 5-84.  
8. If you are installing another internal drive in bank C, D, or E, go to “Installing a  
SCSI Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E.” on page 5-51.  
9. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 and update the drive information; then return here  
to determine your next step.  
10. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
11. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing the Front Covers” on page 5-93.  
5-86 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a SSA Disk Drive from Bank C, D, or E  
Notes:  
Ÿ To locate banks C, D, and E, see the illustration given on page 5-81.  
Ÿ You do not have to turn off the server to remove a drive from banks C, D,  
and E.  
The lights on the disk drive provide status of the drives. See “Disk Drive Status LED  
States” on page 2-18 for a definition of the disk drive status.  
Attention:  
An application procedure unique to your operating system must be followed which  
logically removes the drive from the system and spins it down. If you remove a  
drive while it is in use, your system may lose valuable data.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove a drive from bank C, D, or E, do the following steps:  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
the Front Covers Only” on page 5-6.  
2. Locate the drive you want to remove.  
3. Ensure that you have selected the correct drive.  
4. Press the spin down button on the drive carrier to remove power from the drive.  
The green LED should flash.  
5. Unlock the drive by turning the carrier latch 90 degrees clockwise to the open  
position.  
5-88 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention: SSA backplanes must be fully populated. Each backplane connector  
must have a disk drive or a blank carrier installed at all times. If you remove a  
disk drive from a bay and do not replace it with another disk drive, you must  
install a blank carrier in that bay.  
6. Disconnect the drive from the connector on the backplane, by grasping the  
handle on the drive tray and carefully pulling the drive out of the server. Store  
the drive in a safe place.  
Attention: Handle the disk drive with care as it is very fragile and can be easily  
damaged if exposed to shock, ESD, or rough handling.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. If you are removing another SSA disk drive, return to step 2 on page 5-88.  
8. If you are installing another SSA disk drive in bank C, D, or E, go to “Installing a  
SSA Disk Drive in Bank C, D, or E.” on page 5-55.  
9. Go to Table A-2 on page A-4 and update the drive information; then return here  
to determine your next step.  
10. If you have other procedures to perform, refer to “Option List” on page 5-17.  
11. If you do not have any other procedures to perform, replace the covers as  
described in “Replacing the Front Covers” on page 5-93.  
5-90 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a U-Bolt  
Before you begin, be sure you have:  
Ÿ A 19 mm (3/4 in.) U-bolt or wire rope (similar to National Manufacturing No.  
3230, STK No. 176-735).  
Ÿ A security cable.  
Ÿ A lock, such as a combination lock or padlock.  
Ÿ Remove the system covers as described in “Removing Both the Front and Side  
Covers” on page 5-10.  
1. Install the U-bolt:  
a. Use a screwdriver to remove the two plastic inserts, if present, from the  
U-bolt opening in the rear panel.  
b. Insert the U-bolt through the holes and secure it in place with the nuts.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Reinstall the system's side and front covers, and attach the cables (see  
“Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-96).  
3. Insert the security cable through the U-bolt. Loop the cable around (or through)  
an object from which it cannot be removed; then fasten the cable ends together  
with the lock.  
5-92 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Front Covers  
1. Reinstall the front cover:  
Note: Before installing the front cover, verify that the side cover is installed  
correctly. If the side cover is not properly installed, the front cover will  
not align correctly when you attempt to install it.  
a. Align the bottom of the front cover with the bottom of the system.  
b. Fit the front cover's bottom hooks into the grooves located on the bottom of  
the system.  
c. Make sure the keylock is in the unlocked position.  
d. Pivot the front cover upward and press the top of the cover into the top of  
the system until they snap together and the latch on the left side catches.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Lock the keylock on the front cover.  
f. Close the latch located on the left side of the front cover.  
5-94 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Reinstall the door at the front of the system by aligning the pins with the hinges,  
and sliding the door down.  
3. Close the door.  
Attention: Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 51 mm (2 inches) on all sides  
of the system to allow for air circulation.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers  
1. Reinstall the side cover:  
a. Align the pins on the rear of the side cover with the two hinges on the rear of  
the system. Open the side cover to a 90 degree angle.  
b. Slide the side cover down.  
c. Push the side cover to close it.  
5-96 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Reinstall the front cover:  
Note: Before installing the front cover, verify that the side cover is installed  
correctly. If the side cover is not properly installed, the front cover will  
not align correctly when you attempt to install it.  
a. Align the bottom of the front cover with the bottom of the system.  
b. Fit the front cover's bottom hooks into the grooves located on the bottom of  
the system.  
c. Make sure the keylock is in the unlocked position.  
d. Pivot the front cover upward and press the top of the cover into the top of  
the system until they snap together and the latch on the left side catches.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e. Lock the keylock on the front cover.  
f. Close the latch located on the left side of the front cover.  
5-98 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Reinstall the door at the front of the system by aligning the pins with the hinges,  
and sliding the door down.  
4. Close the door.  
Attention: Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 51 mm (2 inches) on all  
sides of the system to allow for air circulation.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Connect all cables to the back of the system, then plug all power cords into  
properly grounded electrical outlets.  
Note: If you are in the United Kingdom and have a modem or fax machine  
attached to your system, reconnect the telephone line after you plug in  
the power cords.  
5-100 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the I/O Planar Cover  
1. Place the lip at the top of the I/O planar cover over the top of the system adapter  
housing. Push the bottom of the I/P planar cover in, aligning the key on the  
system with the key slot on the cover. Replace the I/O planar cover.  
2. Latch the cover and tighten the three screws.  
Chapter 5. Installing Options 5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-102 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics  
Sources for the Diagnostics  
The diagnostics consist of Standalone Diagnostics and Online Diagnostics.  
Standalone Diagnostics are packaged on removable media. They must be booted or  
mounted before they can be run. If booted, they have no access to the AIX Error Log  
or the AIX Configuration Data. However, if mounted, they have access to the AIX  
Error Log and the AIX Configuration Data. Online Diagnostics, when installed, reside  
with AIX in the file system. They can be booted in single user mode (referred to as  
service mode), run in maintenance mode (referred to as maintenance mode), or run  
concurrently (referred to as concurrent mode) with other applications. They have  
access to the AIX Error Log and the AIX Configuration Data.  
Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations  
Note: When possible, run Online Diagnostics in Service Mode. Online Diagnostics  
perform additional functions, compared to Standalone Diagnostics.  
The following items identify some things to consider before using the diagnostics.  
1. Online Diagnostic support is optionally installed with the AIX operating system  
and therefore may not be installed on some systems. When diagnostics are  
installed, the device support for some devices may not get installed. If this is the  
case, that device does not appear in the diagnostic test list when running disk  
based diagnostics.  
2. Support for some TTY terminals is optionally installed. If you attach a TTY  
terminal to a system to run diagnostics be aware that it may not work properly  
since the AIX support for the terminal may not be installed.  
Selecting a Console Display  
When you run Standalone Diagnostics and under some conditions Online  
Diagnostics, you need to select the console display. The diagnostics display  
instructions on any graphics display and the terminal attached to the Serial 1 port.  
Identifying the Terminal Type to Diagnostics  
Note: This is not the same as selecting a console display.  
When you run diagnostics, the diagnostics must know what type of terminal you are  
using. If the terminal type is not known when the FUNCTION SELECTION menu is  
displayed, the diagnostics do not allow you to continue until a terminal is selected  
from the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu. Select lft for graphical displays.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undefined Terminal Types  
If an undefined terminal type from the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu is entered,  
the menu prompts the user to enter a valid terminal type, and the menu is  
redisplayed until either a valid type is entered or the user exits the DEFINE  
TERMINAL option.  
Resetting the Terminal: If the user enters a terminal type that is valid  
(according to the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu) but is not the correct type for the  
ASCII terminal being used, difficulty may be encountered in reading the screen,  
using the function keys or the Enter key. These difficulties can be bypassed by  
pressing Ctrl-C to reset the terminal. The screen display which results from this  
resetting action varies with the mode in which the system is being run:  
Ÿ Online Normal or Maintenance Mode - The command prompt appears.  
Ÿ Standalone Mode or Online Service Mode -The terminal type is reset to "dumb",  
the Diagnostic Operating Instruction panel is displayed, and the user is required  
to go through the DEFINE TERMINAL process again.  
Running Standalone Diagnostics  
Consider the following when you run Standalone Diagnostics:  
Ÿ The diagnostic disc must remain in the CD-ROM drive for the entire time that  
diagnostics are executing.  
Ÿ The diagnostic CD-ROM cannot be ejected from the CD-ROM drive once the  
diagnostics have loaded. The disc can only be ejected after the system has been  
turned off and then turned on (standalone mode) or after the diagnostics program  
has terminated (Online concurrent mode).  
Ÿ The CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics were loaded cannot be tested.  
Ÿ The SCSI adapter (or circuitry) controlling the CD-ROM drive from which  
diagnostics were loaded cannot be tested.  
Running Online Diagnostics  
Consider the following when you run the Online Diagnostics from a server or a disk:  
Ÿ The diagnostics cannot be loaded and run from a disk until the AIX operating  
system has been installed and configured. After the AIX operating system has  
been installed, all three modes of operation are available.  
Ÿ The diagnostics cannot be loaded on a system (client) from a server if that  
system is not set up to boot from a server over a network. When the system is  
6-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
set up to boot from a server, the diagnostics are run in the same manner as they  
are from disk.  
Ÿ If the diagnostics are loaded from disk or a server, you must shutdown the AIX  
operating system before turning the system unit off to prevent possible damage  
to disk data. This is done in one of two ways:  
– If the diagnostics were loaded in standalone mode, press the F3 key until  
DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS displays; then press the F3 key  
once again to shutdown the AIX operating system.  
– If the diagnostics were loaded in maintenance or concurrent mode, enter the  
shutdown -F command.  
Ÿ Under some conditions the system may stop, with instructions displayed on  
attached displays and terminals. Follow the instructions to select a console  
display.  
Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal  
Consider the following when you run diagnostics using a TTY-type terminal as the  
console display:  
Ÿ See the operator manual for your type of tty terminal to find the key sequences  
you need to respond to the diagnostics. For the 3151, refer to the 3151 ASCII  
Display Station Guide to Operations, form number GA18-2633. For the 3164,  
refer to the 3164 ASCII Color Display Station Description, form number  
GA18-2617.  
Ÿ When the diagnostics present display information through the Serial 1 port,  
certain attributes are used. These attributes are set as if the diagnostics were  
using a 3161 display terminal. The following tables list attributes for the 3161  
ASCII Display Terminal and for two other ASCII display terminals commonly  
used with the system.  
Ÿ If you have a TTY terminal other than a 3151, 3161 or 3164 attached to the  
Serial 1 port, your terminal may have different names for the attributes. Use the  
attribute descriptions in the following tables to determine the settings for your  
terminal.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Attributes Always Required  
The following general attributes are the default settings for the diagnostics. Be sure  
your terminal is set to these attributes.  
Note: These attributes should be set before the diagnostics are loaded.  
Refer to the following table.  
General Setup  
Attributes  
3151  
/11/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161/3164  
Settings  
Description  
Machine mode  
3151  
3151 PC  
3161  
or  
3164  
The diagnostics are set to  
emulate use of the 3161 ASCII  
Display Terminal. If your terminal  
can emulate a 5085, 3161 or  
3164 terminal, use the following  
attribute settings. Otherwise,  
refer to your operator's manual,  
compare the following attribute  
descriptions with those of your  
terminal, and set your attributes  
accordingly.  
Generated  
Code Set  
ASCII  
Screen  
Normal  
24 x 80  
Normal  
24 x 80  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
Row  
and  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
filemn  
Scroll  
Jump  
Off  
Jump  
Off  
Jump  
Off  
When the last character on the  
bottom line is entered, the screen  
moves down one line.  
Auto LF  
For the "On" setting, pressing the  
Return key moves the cursor to  
the first character position of the  
next line. For the "Off" setting,  
pressing the Return key moves  
the cursor to the first character  
position of the current line. The  
CR and LF characters are  
generated by the New line  
setting.  
6-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Setup  
Attributes  
3151  
/11/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161/3164  
Settings  
Description  
CRT saver  
Off  
Off  
10  
The "10" setting causes the  
display screen to go blank if  
there is no activity for 10  
minutes. When the system unit  
sends data or a key is pressed,  
the display screen contents are  
displayed again.  
Line wrap  
On  
On  
On  
The cursor moves to the first  
character position of the next line  
in the page after it reaches the  
last character position of the  
current line in the page.  
Forcing  
insert  
Off  
Off  
Tab  
Field  
Field  
Field  
All  
The column tab stops are  
ignored, and the tab operation  
depends on the field attribute  
character positions.  
Trace  
Both inbound data (data to the  
system unit) and outbound data  
(data from the system unit) to  
and from the main port can be  
transferred to the auxiliary port  
without disturbing  
communications with the system  
unit when the Trace key is  
pressed.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Communication Attributes  
The following communication attributes are for the 3151, 3161, and 3164 terminals.  
Communication  
Setup  
Attributes  
3151  
/11/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161/3164  
Settings  
Description  
Operating mode  
Echo  
Echo  
Echo  
Data entered from the  
keyboard on the terminal is  
sent to the system unit for  
translation and then sent back  
to the display screen.  
Sometimes called  
conversational mode.  
Line speed  
9600 bps  
9600 bps  
9600 bps  
Uses the 9600 bps (bits per  
second) line speed to  
communicate with the system  
unit.  
Word length  
(bits)  
8
8
8
Selects eight bits as a data  
word length (byte).  
Parity  
No  
No  
No  
Does not add a parity bit, and  
is used together with the word  
length attribute to form the  
8-bit data word (byte).  
Stop bit  
1
1
1
Places a bit after a data word  
(byte).  
Turnaround  
character  
CR  
CR  
CR  
Selects the carriage return  
(CR) character as the line  
turnaround character.  
Interface  
EIA-232  
IPRTS  
EIA-232  
IPRTS  
EIA-232  
IPRTS  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
Line control  
Uses the permanent request  
to send' (IPRTS) signal to  
communicate with system  
unit.  
Break signal  
(ms)  
500  
On  
500  
On  
500  
The terminal sends a break  
signal' to the system unit  
within 500 ms after the Break  
key is pressed.  
Send null suppress  
Send null  
Trailing null characters are  
not sent to the system unit.  
On  
Trailing null characters are  
sent to the system unit.  
Response delay (ms)  
100  
100  
100  
The terminal waits for 100ms  
for the system unit to  
respond.  
6-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Keyboard Attributes  
The following keyboard attributes are for the keyboard attached to the 3151, 3161,  
and 3164 terminals.  
Keyboard  
Setup  
Attributes  
3151/11/  
31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161  
/3164  
Settings  
Description  
Enter  
Return  
New line  
CR  
Return  
New line  
CR  
Return  
New line  
CR  
The Enter key functions as the  
Return key.  
Return  
New line  
The cursor moves to the next line  
when the Return key is pressed.  
The Return key generates the  
carriage return (CR) and the line  
feed (LF) characters. The line  
turnaround occurs after the CR and  
LF characters are generated.  
Send  
Page  
Page  
Page  
The contents of the current page are  
sent to the system unit when the  
Send key is pressed.  
Insert  
character  
Space  
Space  
Space  
A blank character is inserted when  
the Insert key is pressed.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Printer Attributes  
The following printer attributes are for a printer attached to the 3151, 3161, and 3164  
terminals.  
Printer  
Setup  
Attributes  
3151/11/  
31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161  
/3164  
Settings  
Description  
Line speed  
9600  
9600  
9600  
Uses 19200 or 9600 bps (bits per  
second) line speed to communicate  
with the system unit.  
Word  
length  
(bits)  
8
8
8
Selects eight bits as a data word  
length (byte).  
Parity  
Even  
1
Even  
1
No  
1
Stop bit  
Characters  
Line end  
Print  
Places a bit after a data word (byte).  
ALL  
ALL  
CR-LF  
Viewport  
Off  
Print EOL  
Print null  
Off  
6-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Online Diagnostics Modes of Operation  
The Online Diagnostics can be run in three modes:  
Ÿ Service Mode  
Ÿ Concurrent Mode  
Ÿ Maintenance Mode  
Service Mode  
Service mode provides the most complete checkout of the system resources. This  
mode also requires that no other programs be running on the system. All system  
resources except the SCSI adapter, and the disk drives used for paging can be  
tested. However, note that the memory and processor are only tested during POST.  
Error log analysis is done in service mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode  
To run Online Diagnostics in service mode, take the following steps:  
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. Turn the power off.  
3. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.  
4. Turn the power on.  
a. When or after the diskette indicator appears, press F6 on the  
directly-attached keyboard or 6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard to indicate  
that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
b. Enter any requested passwords.  
c. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
5. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING  
INSTRUCTIONS appear on the console display.  
6. Follow the displayed instructions to checkout the desired resources.  
7. When testing is complete; use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.  
8. Press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (for an undefined  
terminal) to shutdown the diagnostics before turning off the system unit.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Pressing the F3 key (from a defined terminal) produces a "Confirm Exit"  
popup menu which offers two options: continuing with the shutdown by  
pressing F3; or returning to diagnostics by pressing Enter.  
For undefined terminals, pressing 99 produces a full screen menu which  
offers two options: continuing with the shutdown by pressing 99 and then  
Enter; or returning to diagnostics by pressing Enter.  
Concurrent Mode  
Concurrent mode provides a way to run Online Diagnostics on some of the system  
resources while the system is running normal system activity.  
Because the system is running in normal operation, some of the resources cannot be  
tested in concurrent mode. The following resources cannot be tested in concurrent  
mode:  
Ÿ SCSI adapters connected to paging devices  
Ÿ The disk drive used for paging  
Ÿ Some display adapters  
Ÿ Memory  
Ÿ Processor.  
There are three levels of testing in concurrent mode:  
Ÿ The share-test level tests a resource while the resource is being shared by  
programs running in the normal operation. This testing is mostly limited to normal  
commands that test for the presence of a device or adapter.  
Ÿ The sub-test level tests a portion of a resource while the remaining part of the  
resource is being used in normal operation. For example, this test could test one  
port of a multiport device while the other ports are being used in normal  
operation.  
Ÿ The full-test level requires the device not be assigned to or used by any other  
operation. This level of testing on a disk drive may require the use of the varyoff  
command. The diagnostics display menus to allow you to vary off the needed  
resource.  
Error log analysis is done in concurrent mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
To run the Online Diagnostics in concurrent mode you must be logged onto the AIX  
operating system and have proper authority to issue the commands (if needed, get  
help).  
6-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The diag command loads the diagnostic controller and displays the Online  
Diagnostic menus.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode  
To run Online Diagnostics in concurrent mode, take the following steps:  
Ÿ Log on to the AIX operating system as root or superuser.  
Ÿ Enter the diag command.  
Ÿ When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS are displayed, follow the  
instructions to check out the desired resources.  
Ÿ When testing is complete; use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Then press the F3 key again to return to the AIX  
operating system prompt. Be sure to vary on any resource you had varied to off.  
Ÿ Press the Ctrl-D key sequence to log off from root or superuser.  
Maintenance Mode  
Maintenance mode runs the Online Diagnostics using the customer's version of the  
AIX operating system. This mode requires that all activity on the AIX operating  
system be stopped so the Online Diagnostics have most of the resources available  
to check. All of the system resources except the SCSI adapters, memory, processor,  
and the disk drive used for paging can be checked.  
Error log analysis is done in maintenance mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
The shutdown -m command is used to stop all activity on the AIX operating system  
and put the AIX operating system into maintenance mode. Then the diag command  
is used to invoke the diagnostic controller so you can run the diagnostics. After the  
diagnostic controller is loaded, follow the normal diagnostic instructions.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode  
To run the Online Diagnostics in maintenance mode you must be logged on to the  
customer's version of the AIX operating system as root or superuser and use the  
shutdown -m and diag commands. Use the following steps to run the Online  
Diagnostics in maintenance mode:  
1. Stop all programs except the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. Log onto the AIX operating system as root or superuser.  
3. Enter the shutdown -m command.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. When a message indicates the system is in maintenance mode, enter the diag  
command.  
Note: It may be necessary to set TERM type again.  
5. When DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS is displayed, follow the  
displayed instructions to checkout the desired resources.  
6. When testing is complete; use the F3 key to return to DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Then press the F3 key again to return to the AIX  
operating system prompt.  
7. Press Ctrl-D to log off from root or superuser.  
Standalone Diagnostic Operation  
Standalone Diagnostics provide a method to test the system when the Online  
Diagnostics are not installed and a method of testing the disk drives that cannot be  
tested by the Online Diagnostics.  
No Error Log Analysis is done by the Standalone Diagnostics.  
The CD-ROM drive and the SCSI controller that controls it cannot be tested by the  
Standalone Diagnostics.  
Running the Standalone Diagnostics  
To run Standalone Diagnostics in service mode, take the following steps:  
1. Verify with the system administrator and system users that the system unit may  
be shut down, then stop all programs including the AIX operating system. (Refer  
to the AIX operating system documentation shutdown command information.)  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.  
3. Insert the Diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
4. Turn off the system unit.  
5. Turn the power on.  
a. When or after the diskette indicator appears, press F5 on the direct attached  
keyboard or 5 on the tty keyboard to indicate that diagnostics are to be  
loaded.  
b. Enter any requested passwords.  
c. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
6. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING  
INSTRUCTIONS appear on the console display.  
6-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Follow the displayed instructions to checkout the desired resources.  
8. When testing is complete; use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Location Codes  
This system unit uses Physical Location Codes in conjunction with AIX Location  
Codes to provide mapping of the failing field replaceable units. The location codes  
are produced by the system unit's firmware and AIX.  
Physical Location Codes  
Physical location codes provide a mapping of logical functions in a platform (or  
expansion sites for logical functions, such as connectors or ports) to their specific  
locations within the physical structure of the platform.  
Location Code Format  
The format for the location code is an alphanumeric string of variable length,  
consisting of a series of location identifiers, separated by the standard dash (-) or  
slash (/) character. The series is hierarchical; that is, each location identifier in the  
string is a physical child of the one preceding it.  
Ÿ The - (dash) separator character represents a normal structural relationship  
where the child is a separate physical package and it plugs into (or is connected  
to) the parent. For example, P1-C1 is a CPU card (C1) plugged into a planar  
(P1), or P1-M1 is a memory card (M1) plugged into a planar (P1).  
Ÿ The / (slash) separator character separates the base location code of a function  
from any extended location information. A group of logical devices can have the  
same base location code because they are all on the same physical package,  
but may require extended location information to describe the connectors they  
support. For example, P2/S1 describes the location of the serial port 1 controller  
and its connector (S1), which is located on planar P2 (its base location code),  
but the / indicates that further devices can be connected to it at the external S1  
serial connector. The keyboard controller and its connector likewise have  
location code P2/K1, which means they have the same base location code (P1)  
as serial port 1, but a different external connector. In contrast, the location code  
P2-K1 actually points to the device connected to connector K1; that is, the  
keyboard. The location code P2/Z1 indicates an integrated SCSI controller which  
drives connector Z1, while location codes of P2-Z1-... point to the actual SCSI  
bus and devices.  
Each location identifier consists of one alpha prefix character that identifies a location  
type, and a decimal integer number (typically one or two digits) that identifies a  
specific instance of this location type. Certain location types may also support  
secondary sub-locations, which are indicated by appending a period (".") character  
and a sub-location instance number.  
6-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifically, the format of a location code is defined as follows:  
pn[.n][- or /]pn[.n][- or /]...  
Where p is a defined alpha location type prefix, n is a location instance number, and  
[.n] is a sub-location instance number (where applicable). Sub-location notation is  
used only for location types which have clearly defined and limited expansion sites;  
for example, memory SIMMs slots on a memory card. Primarily, the [.n] sub-location  
notation is intended for use as an abbreviation of the location code in cases where:  
1. Based on the device structure, the abbreviated sub-location code conveys the  
same information in a more concise form than an additional level of location  
identifier -- for example:  
Ÿ P1-M1.4 (pluggable DIMM 4 on Memory Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than  
P1-M1-M4  
Ÿ P1-C1.1 (pluggable CPU 1 on CPU Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than  
P1-C1-C1  
Ÿ P2-Z1-A3.1 (LUN 1 at SCSI ID 3 on integrated SCSI bus 1 from Planar 2),  
rather than P2-Z1-A3-A1  
2. The sub-location is either a basic physical extension or sub-enclosure of the  
base location, but does not represent additional function or connectivity; for  
example, a drawer in a rack (U1.2) or a riser card on an I/O planar (P2.1).  
AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
Central Electronics Complex (CEC)  
System Planar  
00-00  
00-00  
P1  
Processor Card  
1
P1-C1  
P1-C2  
P1-M1  
Processor  
Connectors  
J8 and J5  
CPU ID 0x00  
and 0x01 (if  
2-way card)  
Processor Card  
2
00-00  
Processor  
Connector  
J9 and J6  
CPU ID 0x04  
and 0x05 (if  
2-way card)  
Memory Card 1  
00-00  
00-00  
Processor  
Connector J12  
Memory Card 1  
DIMMS 1 thru  
16  
P1-M1.1  
through  
P1-M1.16  
Memory Card  
Sockets  
J1,J2,J3,J4,  
J5,J6,J7,J8  
J9,J10,J11,J12,  
J13,J14,J15,J16  
Extents:  
8L,8H,10L,10H,  
12L,12H,14L,14H  
9L,9H,11L,11H,  
13L,13H,15L,15H  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
Memory Card 2  
00-00  
00-00  
P1-M2  
Processor  
Connector J13  
Memory Card 2  
DIMMS 1 thru  
16  
P1-M2.1  
through  
P1-M2.16  
Memory Card  
Sockets  
J1,J2,J3,J4,  
J5,J6,J7,J8  
Extents:  
8L,8H,10L,10H,  
12L,12H,14L,14H  
9L,9H,11L,11H,  
13L,13H,15L,15H  
J9,J10,J11,J12,  
J13,J14,J15,J16  
I/O Planar  
00-00  
P2  
Integrated Devices  
Diskette Drive  
Keyboard  
01-D1-00-00  
01-K1-00-00  
01-K1-01-00  
01-D1  
P2-D1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J13  
Base Address  
0x0310  
P2-K1  
P2-O1  
P2/D1  
P2/K1  
P2/O1  
P2/S1  
P2/S2  
P2/S3  
P2/R1  
P2/E1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J23  
Base Address  
0x0060  
Mouse  
I/O Planar  
Connector J27  
0x0060  
0x03f0  
0x0060  
0x0060  
0x0318  
0x0218  
0x0898  
0x0378  
Diskette Port  
Keyboard Port  
Mouse Port  
Serial Port 1  
Serial Port 2  
Serial Port 3  
Parallel Port  
Ethernet Port  
I/O Planar  
Connector J13  
01-K1-00  
01-K1-01  
01-S1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J23  
I/O Planar  
Connector J27  
I/O Planar  
Connector J41  
01-S2  
I/O Planar  
Connector J41  
01-S3  
I/O Planar  
Connector J50  
01-R1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J47  
10-80  
I/O Planar  
Connector  
J18(TH) or  
J21(TP)  
Host Bridge  
ID00, Device 06  
SCSI Port 1  
SCSI Port 2  
10-60  
30-58  
P2/Z1  
P2/Z2  
I/O Planar  
Connector J25  
Host Bridge  
ID00, Device 04  
I/O Planar  
Connector J11  
and J30  
Host Bridge  
ID02, Device 06  
Pluggable Adapters  
6-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
Card in PCI Slot  
1P  
20-58 to 20-5F  
20-60 to 20-67  
10-68 to 10-6F  
10-70 to 10-77  
10-78 to 10-7F  
30-60 to 30-67  
30-68 to 30-6F  
30-70 to 30-77  
30-78 to 30-7F  
01-01 or 01-02  
01-01 or 01-02  
P2-I1  
P2-I2  
P2-I3  
P2-I4  
P2-I5  
P2-I6  
P2-I7  
P2-I8  
P2-I9  
P2-I8  
P2-I9  
I/O Planar  
Connector J1  
Host Bridge  
ID01, Device 01  
Card in PCI Slot  
2P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J2  
Host Bridge  
ID01, Device 02  
Card in PCI Slot  
3P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J3  
Host Bridge  
ID00, Device 03  
Card in PCI Slot  
4P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J4  
Host Bridge  
ID00, Device 04  
Card in PCI Slot  
5P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J5  
Host Bridge  
ID00, Device 05  
Card in PCI Slot  
6P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J6  
Host Bridge  
ID02, Device 02  
Card in PCI Slot  
7P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J7  
Host Bridge  
ID02, Device 03  
Card in PCI Slot  
8P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J8P  
Host Bridge  
ID02, Device 04  
Card in PCI Slot  
9P  
I/O Planar  
Connector J9P  
Host Bridge  
ID02, Device 05  
Card in ISA Slot  
8I  
I/O Planar  
Connector J81  
Card in ISA Slot  
9I  
I/O Planar  
Connector J91  
SCSI Devices  
Base CD-ROM  
(Bay A1)  
10-60-00-6, 0  
10-60-00-4, 0  
10-60-00-5, 0  
P2-Z1-A6  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 6 (refer  
to the note at  
the end of this  
table)  
Media Device in  
Bay B1  
P2-Z1-A4  
P2-Z1-A5  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 4 (refer  
to the note at  
the end of this  
table)  
Media Device in  
Bay B2  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 5 (refer  
to the note at  
the end of this  
table)  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
SCSI Backplane  
C
10-60-00-15, 0  
P2-Z1-B2  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 15  
When  
connected to  
SCSI Port 1  
(P2/Z1)  
SCSI Backplane  
C
30-58-00-15, 0  
P2-Z2-B2  
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 15  
When  
connected to  
SCSI Port 2  
(P2/Z2)  
DASD in Bays  
C1 through C6  
When  
10-60-00-G, 0  
Where G  
identifies  
P2-Z1-B2.1  
through B2.6  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
connected to  
SCSI Port 1  
(P2/Z1)  
Primary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
DASD in Bays  
C1 through C6  
When  
30-58-00-G, 0  
Where G  
identifies  
P2-Z2-B2.1  
through B2.6  
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
connected to  
SCSI Port 2  
(P2/Z2)  
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
SCSI Backplane  
D
30-58-00-15, 0  
P2-Z2-B2  
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 15  
When  
connected to  
SCSI Port 2  
(P2/Z2)  
SCSI Backplane  
D
When  
AB-CD-00-15, 0  
Where AB-CD  
identifies the  
P2-In-Z1-B2  
Bus ID 15  
connected to  
PCI adapter in  
slot P2-In  
adapter's slot  
DASD in Bays  
D1 through D6  
When  
connected to  
SCSI Port 2  
(P2/Z2)  
30-58-00-G, 0  
Where G  
identifies  
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
P2-Z2-B2.1  
through B2.6  
Backplane  
connector J6  
through J11  
Slots A through  
F
Secondary SCSI  
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
6-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
DASD in Bays  
D1 through D6  
When  
connected to  
PCI adapter in  
slot P2-In  
AB-CD-00-G, 0  
Where AB-CD  
identifies the  
adapter's slot  
and G identifies  
the SCSI Bus ID  
8 through 13  
P2-In-Z1-B2.1  
through B2.6  
Backplane  
connector J6  
through J11  
Slots A through  
F
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
SCSI Backplane  
E
When  
AB-CD-00-15, 0  
Where AB-CD  
identifies the  
P2-In-Z1-B2  
Bus ID 15  
connected to  
PCI adapter in  
slot P2-In  
adapter's slot  
DASD in Bays  
E1 through E6  
When  
connected to  
PCI adapter in  
slot P2-In  
AB-CD-00-G, 0  
Where AB-CD  
identifies the  
adapter's slot  
and G identifies  
the SCSI Bus ID  
8 through 13  
P2-In-Z1-B2.1  
through B2.6  
Backplane  
connector J6  
through J11  
Slots A through  
F
Bus ID 8  
through 13  
Fans  
Fan 1  
Fan 2  
Fan 3  
Fan 4  
F1  
Fan connector  
J12 at I/O  
Planar  
F2  
Fan connector  
J17 at I/O  
Planar  
F3  
Fan connector  
J15 at I/O  
Planar  
F4  
Fan connector  
J19 at I/O  
Planar  
Fan 1  
Connector  
P2/F1  
P2/F2  
P2/F3  
P2/F4  
Fan connector  
J12 at I/O  
Planar  
Fan 2  
Connector  
Fan connector  
J17 at I/O  
Planar  
Fan 3  
Connector  
Fan connector  
J15 at I/O  
Planar  
Fan 4  
Connector  
Fan connector  
J19 at I/O  
Planar  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIX  
Physical  
Physical  
Logical  
FRU Name  
Location Code  
Location Code  
Connection  
Identification  
Service Processor  
Service  
P2-X1  
I/O Planar  
Processor  
Connector J10  
Operator Panel  
Operator Panel  
L1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J22A  
Operator Panel  
Connector  
P2/L1  
I/O Planar  
Connector J22A  
Power Supply  
Power Supply  
V1  
I2C Ad 92, Ch2;  
RTAS=9002-0  
Note: The SCSI bus ID's are the recommended values. Features installed at the manufacturing site  
will correspond to these IDs. Field installations may not comply with these recommendations.  
AIX Location Codes  
The basic formats of the AIX location codes are:  
Ÿ For non-SCSI devices/drives  
AB-CD-EF-GH  
Ÿ For SCSI devices/drives  
AB-CD-EF-G,H  
For planars, cards, and non-SCSI devices the location code is defined as:  
AB-CD-EF-GH  
| | | |  
| | | Device/FRU/Port ID  
| | Connector ID  
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location  
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus  
Ÿ The AB value identifies a bus type or PCI parent bus as assigned by the  
firmware.  
Ÿ The CD value identifies adapter number, adapter's devfunc number, or physical  
location. The devfunc number is defined as the PCI device number times 8, plus  
the function number.  
6-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ The EF value identifies a connector.  
Ÿ The GH value identifies a port, address, device, or FRU.  
Adapters and cards are identified with just AB-CD.  
The possible values for AB are:  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
xy  
Processor bus  
ISA bus  
EISA bus  
MCA bus  
PCI bus used in the case where the PCI bus cannot be identified  
PCMCIA buses  
For PCI adapters where x is equal to or greater than 1. The x and y are characters in the  
range of 0-9, A-H, J-N, P-Z (O, I, and lower case are omitted) and are equal to the parent  
bus's ibm, aix-loc Open Firmware Property.  
The possible values for CD depend on the adapter/card.  
For pluggable PCI adapters/cards, CD is the device's devfunc number (PCI device  
number times 8, plus the function number). The C and D are characters in the range  
of 0-9, and A-F (hex numbers). This allows the location code to uniquely identify  
multiple adapters on individual PCI cards.  
For pluggable ISA adapters, CD is equal to the order the ISA cards  
defined/configured either by SMIT or the ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid.  
For integrated ISA adapters, CD is equal to a unique code identifying the ISA  
adapter. In most cases this is equal to the adapter's physical location code. In cases  
where a physical location code is not available, CD will be FF.  
EF is the connector ID. It is used to identify the adapter's connector that a resource  
is attached to.  
GH is used to identify a port, device, or FRU. For example:  
Ÿ For async devices GH defines the port on the fanout box. The values are 00 to  
15.  
Ÿ For a diskette drive H defines which diskette drive 1 or 2. G is always 0.  
Ÿ For all other devices GH is equal to 00.  
For integrated adapter, EF-GH is the same as the definition for a pluggable adapter.  
For example, the location code for a diskette drive is 01-D1-00-00. A second  
diskette drive is 01-D1-00-01.  
For SCSI the location code is defined as:  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AB-CD-EF-G,H  
| | | | |  
| | | | Logical Unit address of the SCSI Device  
| | | Control Unit Address of the SCSI Device  
| | Connector ID  
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location  
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus  
Where AB-CD-EF are the same as non-SCSI devices.  
G defines the control unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 15 are valid.  
H defines the logical unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 255 are valid.  
There is also a bus location code that is generated as '00-XXXXXXXX' where  
XXXXXXXX is equivalant to the node's unit address.  
Examples of physical location codes displayed by AIX are:  
Processor Card in slot 1 of planar 1  
P1-C1  
Memory DIMM in system planar slot 2  
P1-M2  
Memory DIMM 12 in card in slot 2 of system planar  
U1-P1-M2.12  
Examples of AIX location codes displayed are:  
Integrated PCI adapter  
10-80  
10-60  
30-58  
Ethernet  
Integrated SCSI Port 1  
Integrated SCSI Port 2  
Pluggable PCI adapters  
6-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20-58 to 20-5F  
20-60 to 20-67  
10-68 to 10-6F  
10-70 to 10-77  
10-78 to 10-7F  
30-60 to 30-67  
30-68 to 30-6F  
30-70 to 30-77  
30-78 to 30-7F  
Any PCI card in slot 1  
Any PCI card in slot 2  
Any PCI card in slot 3  
Any PCI card in slot 4  
Any PCI card in slot 5  
Any PCI card in slot 6  
Any PCI card in slot 7  
Any PCI card in slot 8  
Any PCI card in slot 9  
Integrated ISA adapters  
01-D1  
01-R1  
01-S1  
01-S2  
01-S3  
01-K1  
Diskette adapter  
Parallel port adapter  
Serial port 1 adapter  
Serial port 2 adapter  
Serial port 3 adapter  
Keyboard adapter  
Non-integrated ISA adapters  
01-01  
01-02  
First ISA card defined/configured  
Second ISA card defined/configured  
Device attached to SCSI controller  
10-60-00-4,0  
Device attached to Integrated SCSI  
Port 1  
Chapter 6. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids  
Introduction to Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
AIX Shell Prompt Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Backup/Restore Media Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Configure Surveillance Policy Service Aid  
Configure Reboot Policy Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid  
Dials and LPFK Configuration Service Aid  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Disk Based Diagnostic Update Service Aid and Update Disk Based Diagnostic  
Task  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Disk Media Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Disk Maintenance Service Aid  
Disk to Disk Copy Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Display/Alter Sector Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Diskette Media Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Display or Change Configuration or Vital Product Data (VPD) Service Aid . . . 7-13  
Display Vital Product Data (VPD) Service Aid and Display Hardware Vital  
Product Data Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Display Configuration Service Aid and Display Configuration and Resource  
List Task  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Add Resource to Resource List Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Delete Resource from Resource List Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Change Configuration Service Aid and Add or Delete Drawer Configuration  
Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Add or Delete Drawer Configuration Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Display and Change Diagnostic Test List Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results Service Aid  
Display Test Patterns Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Enhanced SCSI Display Configuration Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Generic Microcode Download Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Hardware Error Report Service Aid and Display Hardware Error Log Task  
ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid  
Machine Check Error Log Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
. . 7-17  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Microcode Download Service Aid  
Optical Disk Service Aids  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Periodic Diagnostics Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
SCSI Bus Analyzer Task  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Tape Utilities Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22  
Service Hints Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Update System or Service Processor Flash Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Display Firmware Device Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
Display Resource Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
7135 RAIDant Array Service Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25  
7-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Service Aids  
Service Aids  
The diagnostics contain programs called service aids. The service aids are used to  
display data and do additional testing.  
Options for the service aids are available when the software package for that option  
is installed.  
The service aids are selected via the Task Selection Menu.  
Refer to the table on the previous pages for a listing of service aids which are  
provided.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following are descriptions of the service aids:  
AIX Shell Prompt Service Aid  
This service aid allows access to the AIX command line. In order to use this service  
aid the user must know the root password (when a root password has been  
established).  
Backup/Restore Media Service Aid  
This service aid allows verification of backup media and devices. It presents a menu  
of tape and diskette devices available for testing and prompts for selection of the  
desired device. It then presents a menu of available backup formats and prompts for  
selection of the desired format. The supported formats are tar, backup, and cpio.  
After the device and format are selected, the service aid backups a known file to the  
selected device, restores that file to /tmp, and compares the original file to the  
restored file. The restored file is also left in /tmp to allow for visual comparison. All  
errors are reported.  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid  
The Remote Maintenance Policy includes modem configurations and phone numbers  
to use for remote maintenance support.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Remote  
Maintenance Policy.  
Ÿ Configuration File for Modem on S1  
Configuration File for Modem on S2  
Enter the name of a modem configuration file to load on either serial port 1 (S1)  
or serial port 2 (S2). The modem configuration files are located in the directory  
/usr/share/modems. If a modem file is already loaded, it is indicated by 'Modem  
file currently loaded'.  
Ÿ Modem file currently loaded on S1  
Modem file currently loaded on S2  
This is the name of the file that is currently loaded on serial port 1 or  
serial port 2.  
Note: These settings are only shown when a modem file is loaded for a  
serial port.  
Ÿ Call In Authorized on S1 (on/off)  
Call In Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
7-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call In allows the Service Processor to receive a call from a remote terminal.  
Ÿ Call Out Authorized on S1 (on/off)  
Call Out Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
Call Out allows the Service Processor to place calls for maintenance.  
Ÿ S1 Line Speed  
S2 Line Speed  
A list of line speeds is available by using 'List' on the screen.  
Ÿ Service Center Phone Number  
This is the number of the service center computer. The service center usually  
includes a computer that takes calls from systems with call-out capability. This  
computer is referred to as "the catcher". The catcher expects messages in a  
specific format to which the Service Processor conforms. For more information  
about the format and catcher computers, refer to the README file in the AIX  
/usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact the service provider for the correct  
telephone number to enter here.  
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Phone Number  
This is the number of the System Administration Center computer (catcher) that  
receives problem calls from systems. Contact the system administrator for the  
correct telephone number to enter here.  
Ÿ Digital Pager Phone Number In Event of Emergency  
This is the number for a pager carried by someone who will respond to problem  
calls from your system.  
Ÿ Customer Voice Phone Number  
This is the number for a telephone near the system, or answered by someone  
responsible for the system. This is the telephone number left on the pager for  
callback.  
Ÿ Customer System Phone Number  
This is the number to which your system's modem is connected. The service or  
administration center representatives need this number to make direct contact  
with your system for problem investigation. This is also referred to as the Call In  
phone number.  
Ÿ Customer Account Number  
This number could be used by a service provider for record keeping and billing.  
Ÿ Call Out Policy Numbers to call if failure  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This is set to either 'first' or 'all'. If the call out policy is set to 'first', call out will  
stop at the first successful call to one of the following numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Admin Center  
3. Pager  
If Call Out Policy is set to 'all', call out will attempt to call all or the following  
numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Admin Center  
3. Pager  
Ÿ Customer RETAIN Login ID  
Customer RETAIN Login Password  
These settings apply to the RETAIN service function.  
Ÿ Remote Timeout, in seconds  
Remote Latency, in seconds  
These settings are functions of the service provider's catcher computer.  
Ÿ Number of Retries While Busy  
This is the number of times the system should retry calls that resulted in busy  
signals.  
Ÿ System Name (System Administrator Aid)  
This is the name given to the system and is used when reporting problem  
messages.  
Note: Knowing the system name aids the support team to quickly identify the  
location, configuration, history, etc. of your system.  
This service aid may be accessed directly from the AIX command line, by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -m  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy Service Aid  
This service aid allows the user to power on a system by telephone from a remote  
location. If the system is powered off, and Ring Indicate Power On is enabled, the  
system will power on at a predetermined number of rings. If the system is already  
on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not answered and the  
caller receives no feedback that the system has powered on.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Ring Indicate  
Power On Policy.  
7-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Power On Via Ring Indicate (on/off)  
Ÿ Number of Rings Before Power On  
This service aid may be accessed directly from the AIX command line, by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -r  
Configure Surveillance Policy Service Aid  
This service aid monitors the system for hang conditions, that is, hardware or  
software failures that cause operating system inactivity. When enabled, and  
surveillance detects operating system inactiviy, a call is placed to report the failure.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Surveillance  
Policy.  
Ÿ Surveillance (on/off)  
Ÿ Surveillance Time Interval  
This is the maximum time, in minutes, between heartbeats from the operating  
system.  
Ÿ Surveillance Time Delay  
This is the time to delay, in minutes between when the operating system is in  
control and when to begin operating system surveillance.  
Ÿ Changes are to take affect immediately  
Set this to Yes if the changes made to the settings in this menu are to take place  
immediately. Otherwise the changes will take place beginning with the next  
system boot.  
This service aid may be accessed directly from the AIX command line, by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -s  
Configure Reboot Policy Service Aid  
This service aid controls how the system will try to recover from a system crash.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Reboot  
Policy.  
Ÿ Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts  
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: A value of 0 indicates 'do not attempt to reboot' to a crashed system.  
This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts to reboot the  
system. The term "reboot", in the context of this service aid, is used to describe  
bringing system hardware back up from scratch, for example from a system reset  
or power on.  
Once the Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts is exceeded, the system will call  
out if that function has been enabled.  
When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot attempts count is  
reset to 0, and a "restart" begins. The term "restart", in the context of this serivice  
aid, is used to describe the operating system activation process. Restart always  
follows a successful reboot.  
When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system will attempt to  
reboot for the maximum number of attempts.  
Ÿ Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When 'Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy' is set to Yes, the system will attempt  
to reboot from a crash if the operating system has an enabled Defined Restart or  
Reboot Policy.  
When 'Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy' is set to No, or the operating system  
restart policy is undefined, then the restart policy is determined by the  
'Supplemental Restart Policy'.  
Ÿ Enable Supplemental Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
The 'Supplemental Restart Policy', if enabled, is used when the O/S Defined  
Restart Policy is undefined, or is set to False.  
When surveillance detects operating system inactivity during restart, an enabled  
'Supplemental Restart Policy' causes a system reset and the reboot process  
begins.  
Ÿ Call-Out Before Restart (on/off)  
When enabled, Call-Out Before Restart will allow the system to call out (on a  
serial port that is enabled for call out) when an operating system restart is  
initiated. Such calls can be valuable if the number of these events becomes  
excessive, thus signalling bigger problems.  
Ÿ Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When enabled, 'Unattended Start Mode' will allow the system to recover from the  
loss of AC power.  
If the system was powered-on when the AC loss occured, the system will reboot  
when power is restored. If the system was powered-off when the AC loss  
occured, the system will remain off when power is restored.  
7-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This service aid may be accessed directly from the AIX command line, by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -b  
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies Service Aid  
Ring Indicate Power On Policy, Surveillance Policy, Remote Maintenance Policy and  
Reboot Policy.  
Ÿ Save Hardware Management Policies  
This selection will write all of the settings for the hardware management policies  
to the file:  
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies  
Ÿ Restore Hardware Management Policies  
This selection will restore all of the settings for the hardware management  
policies from the contents of the file:  
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies  
This service aid may be accessed directly from the AIX command line, by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -a  
Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid  
The Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid allows the user to perform the following  
actions:  
Ÿ Format a 1, 2, or 4MB diskette  
Ÿ Create a Standalone Diagnostic Package Configuration Diskette  
The Standalone Diagnostic Package Configuration Diskette allows the following  
to be changed from the console:  
– Default refresh rate for a LFT  
The refresh rate used by the standalone diagnostic package is 60Hz. If the  
display's refresh rate is 77Hz, then set the refresh rate to 77.  
– Different async terminal console  
A console configuration file that allows a terminal attached to any RS232 or  
RS422 adapter to be selected as a console device can be created using this  
service aid. The default device is a RS232 tty attached to the first standard  
serial port (S1).  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dials and LPFK Configuration Service Aid  
This service aid provides a tool for configuring and removing dials/LPFKs to the  
standard serial ports.  
The Dials and LPFKs can be configured on any async port. A tty must be in the  
available state on the async port before the Dials and LPFKs can be configured on  
the port. The task allows an async adapter to be configured, then a tty port defined  
on the adapter, and then Dials and LPFKs can be defined on the port.  
Disk Based Diagnostic Update Service Aid and Update Disk Based  
Diagnostic Task  
This service aid allows fixes (APARs) to be applied.  
The task invokes the SMIT Update Software by Fix (APAR) task. The task allows  
the input device and APARs to be selected. Any APAR can be installed using this  
task.  
Disk Media Service Aids  
This service aid consists of a Format, Certify, and Erase service aid for each type of  
hard disk supported, and Optical Disk service aid for supported optical disks.  
Ÿ Certify  
Certify reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts all  
errors encountered. If more than 10 hard data errors or more than 1 hard  
equipment error is found, the user is prompted to replace the drive. One or less  
recovered data errors per megabyte is normal. More than one recoverable data  
error per megabyte indicates that the disk should be formatted and certified.  
Disk errors are not logged during certify.  
Ÿ Format  
Format writes all the disk. The pattern put on the disk is device dependent, i.e.  
some drives may put all 0s, while some may put hexadecimal number 5F. No  
bad block reassignment occurs  
Ÿ Format and Certify  
Format and Certify does the same as format does. After the Format is  
completed, Certify is run. This Certify will reassign all bad blocks encountered.  
Ÿ Erase Disk  
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in  
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more  
7-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be  
read and displayed on the system console.  
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written.  
Select the patterns to be written; the patterns are written serially. That is, the  
first pattern is written to all blocks. Then the next pattern is written to all blocks,  
overlaying the previous pattern. A random pattern is written by selecting the  
"Write random pattern?" option.  
The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the Department of  
Defense or any other organizations security guidelines. The following steps  
should be followed if the data on the drive is to be overwritten:  
1. Run the "Erase Disk" Service Aid to overwrite the data on the drive.  
2. Do a format without certify.  
3. Run a second pass of the erase service aid.  
For a newly installed drive, you can insure that all blocks on the drive will be  
overwritten with your pattern if you use the following procedure:  
1. Format the drive.  
2. Check the defect map by running the Erase Disk Service Aid.  
Note: If you use the "Format and Certify" option, there may be some blocks  
which get placed into the grown defect map.  
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect map, record the information presented  
and ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used later  
when the drive is to be overwritten.  
4. Use the drive as you would normally.  
5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same  
version of the Erase Disk Service Aid which was used in step 2.  
Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if there were  
any bad blocks found in step 3.  
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded with the drive in step 3 with  
those which now appear in the grown defect map.  
Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly  
obtained data, then all of the sectors on this drive cannot be  
overwritten. The new bad blocks will not be overwritten.  
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite  
the disk with the chosen pattern(s).  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disk Maintenance Service Aid  
Ÿ Disk to Disk Copy Service Aid  
Ÿ Display/Alter Sector Service Aid  
Disk to Disk Copy Service Aid  
The service aid allows you to recover data from an old drive when replacing it with a  
new drive. The service aid only supports copying from a drive to another drive of  
similar size. This service aid cannot be used to update to a different size drive. The  
migratepv command should be used when updating drives. The service aid  
recovers all LVM software reassigned blocks. To prevent corrupted data from being  
copied to the new drive, the service aid aborts if an unrecoverable read error is  
detected. To help prevent possible problems with the new drive, the service aid  
aborts if the number of bad blocks being reassigned reaches a threshold.  
The procedure for using this service aid requires that both the old and new disks be  
installed in or attached to the system with unique SCSI addresses. This requires  
that the new disk drive SCSI address must be set to an address that is not currently  
in used and the drive be installed in an empty location. If there are no empty  
locations, then one of the other drives has to be removed. Once the copy is  
complete, only one drive may remain installed. Either remove the target drive to  
return to the original configuration, or perform the following procedure to complete  
the replacement of the old drive with the new drive.  
1. Remove both drives.  
2. Set the SCSI address of the new drive to the SCSI address of the old drive.  
3. Install the new drive in the old drive's location.  
4. Install any other drives that were removed into their original location.  
To prevent problems that may occur when running this service aid from disk, it is  
suggested that this service aid be run from the diagnostics that are loaded from  
removable media when possible.  
7-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display/Alter Sector Service Aid  
This service aid allows the user to display and alter information on a disk sector.  
Care must be used when using this service aid because inappropriate modification to  
some disk sectors may result in total loss of all data on the disk. Sectors are  
addressed by their decimal sector number. Data is displayed both in hex and in  
ASCII. To prevent corrupted data from being incorrectly corrected, the service aid will  
not display information that cannot be read correctly.  
Diskette Media Service Aid  
This service aid provides a way to verify the data written on a diskette. When this  
service aid is selected, a menu asks you to select the type of diskette being verified.  
The program then reads all of the ID and data fields on the diskette one time and  
displays the total number of bad sectors found.  
Display or Change Configuration or Vital Product Data (VPD) Service  
Aid  
This service aid allows the user to display, change configuration, data and vital  
product data (VPD).  
The following are the task selections which appear on the Task Selection Menu:  
Ÿ Display Configuration and Resource List  
Ÿ Display Hardware Vital Product Data  
Ÿ Change Hardware Vital Product Data  
Ÿ Add or Delete Drawer configuration  
Display Vital Product Data (VPD) Service Aid and Display Hardware Vital  
Product Data Task  
This service aid displays all installed resources along with any VPD for those  
resources. Use this service aid when you want to look at the VPD for a specific  
resource.  
This service aid displays information about the installed software and provides the  
following functions:  
Ÿ List Installed Software  
Ÿ List Applied but Not Committed Software Updates  
Ÿ Show Software Installation History  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Show Fix (APAR) Installation Status  
Ÿ List Fileset Requisites  
Ÿ List Fileset Dependents  
Ÿ List Files Included in a Fileset  
Ÿ List File Owner by Fileset  
Display Configuration Service Aid and Display Configuration and  
Resource List Task  
This service aid will display the item header only for all installed resources. Use this  
service aid when there is no need of seeing the VPD. (No VPD will be displayed.)  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data Task  
Use this service aid to display the Display/Alter VPD Selection Menu. The menu will  
list all resources installed on the system. When a resource is selected a menu is  
displayed that lists all the VPD for that resource.  
Note: The user cannot alter the VPD for a specific resource unless it is not machine  
readable.  
Add Resource to Resource List Task  
Use this task to add resources back to the resource list.  
Delete Resource from Resource List Task  
Use this task to delete resources from the resource list.  
Change Configuration Service Aid and Add or Delete Drawer  
Configuration Task  
Use this service aid to add or delete features to the system configuration.  
Note: Drawers are the only features that can be added or deleted.  
Add or Delete Drawer Configuration Task  
This task provides the following options:  
Ÿ List all Drawers  
Ÿ Add a Drawer  
Ÿ Remove a Drawer  
7-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The supported drawer types are:  
Ÿ Media SCSI Device Drawer  
Ÿ DASD SCSI DASD Drawer  
Display and Change Diagnostic Test List Service Aid  
This service aid provides a way to:  
Ÿ Display the Diagnostic Test List  
This selection lists all of the resources tested by the diagnostics.  
Ÿ Add a resource to the Diagnostic Test List  
This selection allows resources to be added back to the Diagnostic Test List. The  
Diagnostic Test List Menu lists all resources that can be added back to the  
Diagnostic Test List.  
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and  
deleted from the Diagnostic Test List is listed. If no resources are available to be  
added, then none are listed.  
Ÿ Delete a resource from the Diagnostic Test List  
This selection allows resources to be deleted from the Diagnostic Test List. The  
Diagnostic Test List Menu lists all resources that can be deleted from the  
Diagnostic Test List.  
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and  
have not been deleted from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources  
are available to be deleted, then none are listed.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results Service Aid  
Note: This service aid is not available when you load the diagnostics from a source  
other than a disk drive or from a network.  
Each time the diagnostics produce a service request number (SRN) to report a  
problem, information about that problem is logged. The service representative can  
look at this log to see which SRNs are recorded. This log also records the results of  
diagnostic tests that are run in loop mode.  
When this service aid is selected, information on the last problem logged is  
displayed. The Page Down and Page Up keys can be used to look at information  
about previous problems.  
This information is not from the error log maintained by the AIX operating system.  
This information is stored in the /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/*.dat file.  
Display Test Patterns Service Aid  
This service aid provides a means of making adjustments to system display units by  
providing displayable test patterns. Through a series of menus the user selects the  
display type and test pattern. After the selections are made the test pattern is  
displayed.  
Enhanced SCSI Display Configuration Service Aid  
This service aid allows the user to choose a SCSI device or location from a menu  
and to identify a device.  
The service aid also does the following:  
Ÿ Generate a menu which displays all SCSI devices.  
Ÿ Lists the device and all of it's sibling devices.  
Ÿ List all SCSI adapters and their ports.  
Ÿ List all SCSI devices on a port.  
7-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Generic Microcode Download Service Aid  
This service aid provides a means of restoring a diskette (or other media) and  
executing a restored program. This program will do whatever is required to  
download the microcode onto the adapter or device.  
This service aid is supported in both concurrent and standalone modes from disk,  
LAN, or loadable media.  
When entered, this service aid displays information about what it does. It then asks  
for a microcode diskette to be inserted into the diskette drive. The diskette is in  
backup format. The service aid then restores the diskette to the /tmp directory and  
execute a program called diagucode. Once diagucode has completed, you are then  
returned to the service aid.  
Hardware Error Report Service Aid and Display Hardware Error Log  
Task  
This service aid provides a tool for viewing the hardware error log. It uses the errpt  
command.  
The Display Error Summary and Display Error Detail selection provide the same type  
of report as the errpt command. The Display Error Analysis Summary and Display  
Error Analysis Detail selection provide additional analysis.  
ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid  
The ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid allows the identification and configuration  
of ISA adapters on systems that have an ISA bus and adapters.  
This service aid also displays all ISA adapters supported by diagnostics. Diagnostic  
support for ISA adapters not shown in the list may be supported from a  
Supplemental Diskette. ISA adapter support can be added from a Supplemental  
Diskette with this service aid.  
Whenever an ISA adapter is installed, this Service Aid must be run and the adapter  
configured before the adapter can be tested. This Service Aid must also be run (and  
the adapter removed) whenever an ISA adapter is physically removed from the  
system.  
If diagnostics are run on an ISA adapter that has been removed from the system,the  
diagnostics fail.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This service aid is only supported by the Standalone Diagnostics. SMIT should be  
used to configure ISA adapters for AIX.  
ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system.  
Note: When using this service aid choose the option that places the adapter in the  
"Defined State". Do not select the option that places the device in the "Available  
State.  
Machine Check Error Log Service Aid  
Note: The Machine Check Error Log Service Aid is available only on Standalone  
Diagnostics.  
When a machine check occurs, information is collected and logged in a NVRAM  
error log before the system unit shuts down. This information is logged in the AIX  
error log and cleared from NVRAM when the system is rebooted from either hard  
disk or LAN. The information is not cleared when booting from Standalone  
Diagnostics. When booting from Standalone Diagnostics, this service aid can take  
the logged information and turn it into a readable format that can be used to isolate  
the problem. When booting from the hard disk or LAN, the information can be  
viewed from the AIX error log using the Hardware Error Report Service Aid. In either  
case the information is analyzed when running the sysplanarð diagnostics in  
Problem Determination Mode.  
Microcode Download Service Aid  
This service aid provides a way to copy device microcode to a device. It is used to  
update the microcode on a device. It presents a list of devices that use microcode.  
The device on which the microcode is to be installed is selected. The service aid  
instructs the user on its use.  
7-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optical Disk Service Aids  
The Optical Disk Service Aids consist of Initialize, Format and Certify, and Spare  
Sector Availability service aids.  
Ÿ Initialize  
This service aid is used to format the optical disk without certifying it. This option  
does not reassign the defective sectors; however, it is a quick way of formatting  
after cleaning the disk.  
Ÿ Format and Certify  
This service aid is used to format the optical disk and certify it. The certification  
process is drive specific and performs the surface analysis of all user data and  
spare sectors. The defective sectors are reassigned.  
Ÿ Spare Sector Availability  
This service aid checks the number of spare sectors available on the optical disk.  
The spare sectors are used to reassign when defective sectors are encountered  
during normal usage or during a format and certify operation. Low availability of  
spare sectors indicates that the disk needs to be backed up and replaced.  
Formatting the disk will not improve the availability of spare sectors.  
Periodic Diagnostics Service Aid  
This service aid provides a tool for configuring periodic diagnostics and automatic  
error log analysis. A hardware resource can be chosen to be tested once a day, at a  
user specified time. If the resource cannot be tested because it is busy, error log  
analysis is performed. Hardware errors logged against a resource can also be  
monitored by enabling Automatic Error Log Analysis. This allows error log analysis to  
be performed every time a hardware error is put into the error log. If a problem is  
detected, a message is posted to the system console and a mail message sent to  
the user(s) belonging to the system group with information about the failure such as  
Service Request Number.  
The service aid provides the following functions:  
Ÿ Add or delete a resource to the periodic test list  
Ÿ Modify the time to test a resource  
Ÿ Display the periodic test list  
Ÿ Modify the error notification mailing list  
Ÿ Disable Automatic Error Log Analysis  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Bus Analyzer Task  
This service aid provides a means to diagnose a SCSI Bus problem in a free-lance  
mode.  
To use this service aid, the user should have an understanding of how a SCSI Bus  
works. This service aid should be used when the diagnostics cannot communicate  
with anything on the SCSI Bus and cannot isolate the problem. Normally the  
procedure for finding a problem on the SCSI Bus with this service aid is to start with  
a single device attached, ensure that it is working, then start adding additional  
devices and cables to the bus ensuring that each one works. This service aid will  
work with any valid SCSI Bus configuration.  
7-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The SCSI Bus Service Aid transmits a SCSI Inquiry command to a selectable SCSI  
Address. The service aid then waits for a response. If no response is received  
within a defined amount of time, the service aid will display a timeout message. If an  
error occurs or a response is received, the service aid will then display one of the  
following messages:  
Ÿ The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and received a valid  
response back without any errors being detected.  
Ÿ The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and did not receive any  
response or error status back.  
Ÿ The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and the adapter indicated  
a SCSI bus error.  
Ÿ The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and an adapter error  
occurred.  
Ÿ The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and a check condition  
occur.  
When the SCSI Bus Service Aid is entered a description of the service aid is  
displayed.  
Pressing the Enter key will display the Adapter Selection menu. This menu allows  
the user to enter which address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.  
When the adapter is selected the SCSI Bus Address Selection menu is displayed.  
This menu allows the user to enter which address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry  
Command.  
Once the address is selected the SCSI Bus Test Run menu is displayed. This  
menus allows the user to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command by pressing the Enter  
key. The Service Aid will then indicate the status of the transmission. When the  
transmission is completed, the results of the transmission is displayed.  
Notes:  
Ÿ A Check Condition can be returned when there is nothing wrong with the bus  
or device.  
Ÿ AIX does not allow the command to be sent if the device is in use by another  
process.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Tape Utilities Service Aid  
This service aid provides a means to obtain the status or maintenance information  
from a SCSI tape drive. Only some models of SCSI tape drive are supported.  
The service aid provides the following options:  
Ÿ Display time since a tape drive was last cleaned.  
The time since the drive was last cleaned is displayed onto the screen. In  
addition, a message whether the drive is recommended to be cleaned will also  
be displayed.  
Ÿ Copy a tape drive's trace table.  
Ÿ The trace table of the tape drive is written to diskettes.  
The required diskettes must be formatted for DOS. Writing the trace table may  
require several diskettes. The actual number of required diskettes will be  
determined by the service aid based on the size of the trace table. The names  
of the data files is of the following format:  
'TRACE<X>.DAT' where 'X' is the a sequential diskette number. The complete  
trace table consists of the sequential concatenation of all the diskette data files.  
7-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ÿ Display or copy a tape drive's log sense information.  
The service aid will provides options to display the log sense information to  
screen, to copy it to a DOS formatted diskette or to copy it to a file. The file  
name "LOGSENSE.DAT" is used when the log sense data is written on the  
diskette. The service aid prompts for a file name when the log sense data is  
chosen to be copied to a file.  
Service Hints Service Aid  
This service aid reads and displays the information in the CEREADME file from the  
diagnostics source (diskettes, disk, or CD-ROM). This file contains information that  
is not in the publications for this version of the diagnostics. It also contains  
information about using this particular version of diagnostics.  
Use the Enter key to page forward through the information or the - (dash) and Enter  
keys to page backward through the file.  
Update System or Service Processor Flash Service Aid  
Note: This service aid is only supported for Online Diagnostics  
This service aid allows you to update the system or service processor flash.  
Additional update and recovery instructions may be provided; also you need to know  
the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file. If the flash  
update image file is on a diskette, you need the AIX DOS utilities package to process  
the diskette. You can use the dosdir command to find out the name of the update  
image file. This service aid uses the dosread command to put the file into the /var  
file system.  
Refer to the update instructions, or to the System Management Services “Config” on  
page 3-5 or “Display Configuration” on page 3-26 or Service Processor menus on  
page 4-7, to determine the level of the system unit or service processor flash. Using  
this service aid to update the system or service processor flash will not save the  
current contents of the flash.  
The flash image file will be copied in the /var file system. If there is not enough  
space in the /var file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If  
this occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file system and retry the  
service aid. After the file is copied, a warning screen will ask for confirmation to  
continue the flash update. Continuing the flash update will eventually cause the  
system to reboot and return to the AIX login prompt. After the system unit reboots,  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the file /var/update_flash_image can be removed to conserve space in the /var file  
system.  
Display Firmware Device Node  
Note: Runs on CHRP systems units only.  
This task displays the firmware device node information that appears on CHRP  
platforms. The format of the output data will not necessarily be the same between  
different levels of AIX. It is intended to be used to gather more information about  
individual or particular devices on the system.  
Display Resource Attributes  
This task will display the Customized Device Attributes associated with a selected  
resource. This task is similar to running the lsattr -E -l resource command.  
7-24 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7135 RAIDant Array Service Aid  
The 7135 RAIDant Array service aids contain the following functions:  
Ÿ Certify LUN  
This selection reads and checks each block of data in the LUN. If excessive  
errors are encountered the user will be notified.  
Ÿ Certify Spare Physical Disk  
This selection allows the user to certify (check the integrity of the data) on drives  
designated as spares.  
Ÿ Format Physical Disk  
This selection is used to format a selected disk drive.  
Ÿ Array Controller Microcode Download  
This selection allows the microcode on the 7135 controller to be updated when  
required.  
Ÿ Physical Disk Microcode Download  
This selection is used to update the microcode on any of the disk drives in the  
array.  
Ÿ Update EEPROM  
This selection is used to update the contents of the EEPROM on a selected  
controller.  
Ÿ Replace Controller  
Use this selection when it is necessary to replace a controller in the array.  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify  
This selection will identify physical disks connected to a PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID  
adapter.  
Chapter 7. Using the Service Aids 7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-26 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Using the System Verification Procedure  
The system verification procedure is used to check the system for correct operation.  
When you are analyzing a hardware problem, you should use Chapter 9, “Hardware  
Problem Determination” on page 9-1.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Notes:  
1. If this system unit is directly attached to another system unit or attached to a  
network, be sure communications with the other system unit is stopped.  
2. This procedure requires use of all of the system resources. No other activity can  
be running on the system while you are doing this procedure.  
Ÿ This procedure requires a display connected to the video port or an ASCII  
terminal attached to the S1 port.  
Ÿ Before starting this procedure, you should stop all programs and the operating  
system.  
Ÿ This procedure runs the Online Diagnostics in Service mode or Standalone  
Diagnostics. If the Online Diagnostics are installed, they should be run. See the  
operator manual for your type of ASCII terminal to find the key sequences you  
need in order to respond to the diagnostics.  
Ÿ If you need more information about diagnostics see Chapter 6, “Using the Online  
and Standalone Diagnostics” on page 6-1.  
Ÿ If a console display is not selected, the diagnostics stop. The instructions for  
selecting a console display are displayed on all of the graphic displays and any  
terminal attached to the S1 port. Follow the displayed instructions to select a  
console display.  
Ÿ ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system. The ISA adapter Configuration  
Service Aid allows the identification and configuration of ISA adapters when  
running standalone diagnostics.  
Ÿ Go to Step 2.  
Chapter 8. Using the System Verification Procedure 8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics  
1. Stop all application programs running on the operating system.  
2. Stop the operating system.  
3. Turn the power off.  
4. If you are loading the Standalone Diagnostics and running them from an ASCII  
terminal:  
Ÿ The attributes for the terminal must be set to match the defaults of the  
diagnostics.  
Ÿ If you need to change any settings, record the normal settings, and be sure  
the terminal attributes are set to work with the diagnostics. If needed, see  
“Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal” on page 6-3.  
Ÿ Return to substep 5 when you finish checking the attributes.  
5. Turn the power on.  
a. When the keyboard indicator appears, press F5 on the direct attached  
keyboard (5 on the ASCII keyboard) to load the Standalone Diagnostics or  
F6 on the directly-attached keyboard (6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard) to  
load the Online Diagnostics.  
b. Enter any requested passwords.  
c. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
6. When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, go to Step 3. If you are  
unable to load the diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to  
Load Diagnostics” on page 9-10.  
8-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3. Running System Verification  
The Diagnostic Operating Instructions should be displayed.  
1. Press the Enter key.  
2. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initialize  
Terminal option on the Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system  
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics.  
3. If you want to do a general checkout without much operator action, Select the  
Diagnostic Routines option on the Function Selection menu.  
If you want to do a more complete checkout including the use of wrap plugs,  
select the Advanced Diagnostics option on the Function Selection menu. The  
advanced diagnostics are primarily for the service representative; they may  
instruct you to install wrap plugs to better isolate a problem.  
4. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.  
5. If you want to run a general checkout of all installed resources, Select the All  
Resource option on the Diagnostic Selection menu.  
If you want to check one particular resource, select that resource on the  
Diagnostic Selection menu.  
6. Go to Step 4.  
Step 4. Additional System Verification  
The checkout programs end with either the Testing Complete menu and a message  
stating No trouble was found or the A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp)  
menu with an SRN.  
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.  
2. If you want to check other resources, select the resource. When you have  
checked all of the resources you need to check, go to Step 5.  
Chapter 8. Using the System Verification Procedure 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics  
1. If running Online diagnostics, the system first should be shut down using the  
following procedure:  
a. Press F3 repeatedly until you get to the Diagnostic Operating Instructions,  
then follow the displayed instructions.  
b. Press F3 once, and then follow the displayed instructions to shut down  
system.  
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics,  
change the settings back to normal.  
3. This completes the system verification. Report the SRN to the service  
organization if you received one. To do a normal boot, turn off the system unit  
and wait 30 seconds, and then set the power switch of the system unit to On.  
8-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination  
Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics  
Use this procedure to obtain a service request number (SRN) when you are able to  
load the Standalone or Online Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the Standalone  
or Online Diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to Load  
Diagnostics” on page 9-10. The service organization uses the SRN to determine  
which field replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the system to correct  
operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Note: See the operator manual for your ASCII terminal to find the key sequences  
you need to respond to the diagnostic programs.  
Ÿ The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or a ASCII  
terminal attached to a serial port.  
Ÿ This procedure asks you to select the type of diagnostics you want to run. If you  
need more information about the types, see “Standalone and Online Diagnostics  
Operating Considerations” on page 6-1.  
Ÿ ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system. The ISA adapter Configuration  
Service Aid allows the identification and configuration of ISA adapters for  
Standalone Diagnostics. ISA adapters must be identified and configured before  
they can be tested.  
Ÿ Go to “Step 2.”  
Step 2  
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 15.”  
Go to “Step 3.”  
YES  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3  
Determine if the operating system is accepting commands.  
Is the operating system accepting commands?  
NO  
The system must be turned off in order to run diagnostics.  
1. Verify with the system administration and users that the system may  
be turned off. If so, then turn off the system unit and go to “Step 6.”  
YES  
Go to “Step 4.”  
Step 4  
Diagnostic tests can be run on many resources while the operating system is  
running. However, more extensive problem isolation is obtained by running Online  
Diagnostics in Service mode.  
Do you want to run the Online Diagnostics in Service mode?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5.”  
YES  
Do the following to shut down your system:  
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the proper  
command for your operating system.  
2. After the operating system is stopped, power off the system unit.  
3. Go to “Step 6.”  
9-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5  
This step invokes the Online Diagnostics in concurrent mode.  
1. Log on as root or as superuser.  
2. Enter the diag command.  
3. Wait until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions are displayed, or wait for three  
minutes.  
Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed without any obvious  
console display problems?  
NO  
Do the following to shut down your system:  
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the proper  
command for your operating system.  
2. After the operating system is stopped, power off the system unit.  
3. Go to “Step 6.”  
Go to “Step 9.”  
YES  
Step 6  
This step loads Online Diagnostics in service mode. If you are unable to load the  
diagnostics, go to “Step 7.”  
1. Turn the power on.  
2. When the keyboard indicator (icon or text) appears, press F6 on the  
directly-attached keyboard or 6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard to indicate that  
diagnostics are to be loaded.  
3. Enter any requested passwords.  
4. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7.”  
Go to “Step 9.”  
YES  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 7  
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Symptom  
Action  
Display problem.  
All other symptoms.  
Go to “Step 8.”  
Go to “Problem Determination When Unable to  
Load Diagnostics” on page 9-10  
Step 8  
The following steps analyze a console display problem.  
Find your type of console display in the following table, then follow the instructions  
given in the Action column.  
Console Display  
Action  
Display Device  
Go to the display documentation for problem  
determination.  
ASCII terminal  
Go to the documentation for problem  
determination for this type of terminal.  
Step 9  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Press the Enter key.  
Is the Function Selection menu displayed?  
NO  
Go to “Step 10.”  
Go to “Step 11.”  
YES  
9-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 10  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table, then follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Keyboard Type  
Action  
101–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter  
key used. The Enter key is within one horizontal  
row of keys.  
Record error code M0KBD001 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
102–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter  
key used. The Enter key extends into two  
horizontal rows of keys.  
Record error code M0KBD002 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese  
characters.  
Record error code M0KBD003 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
ASCII–terminal keyboard. This applies to all  
attached terminals.  
Go to the documentation for problem  
determination for this type terminal.  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 11  
1. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initialize  
Terminal option on the Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system  
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and  
different operation than selecting the console display.  
2. Select Diagnostic Routines.  
3. Press the Enter key.  
4. In the following table, find the menu or system response you received when you  
selected Diagnostics. Follow the instructions given in the Action column.  
System Response  
Action  
The Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed.  
Select Problem Determination and go to “Step  
12.”  
The Missing Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions until either the  
Diagnostic Mode Selection menu or an SRN is  
displayed.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed, select Problem Determination and go  
to “Step 12.”  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step  
14.”  
The New Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
Note: Devices attached to serial ports S1 or  
S2 will not appear on the New Resource  
menu. Also, ISA adapters do not appear  
unless they have been identified and  
configured.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed, select Problem Determination and go  
to “Step 12.”  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step  
14.”  
If you do not get an SRN, go to “Step 17.”  
Go to “Step 10.”  
The system does not respond to selecting  
diagnostics  
9-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 12  
Did the Diagnostic Selection Menu display?  
NO  
If Problem Determination was selected from the Diagnostic Mode  
Selection menu, and if a recent error has been logged in the error log, the  
diagnostics automatically begin testing the resource.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
If the No Trouble Found screen is displayed, press Enter.  
If another resource is tested, repeat this step.  
If the Diagnostic Selection menu is displayed, go to “Step 13.”  
If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to “Step 14.”  
Go to “Step 13.”  
YES  
Step 13  
The All Resources option checks most of the configured adapters and devices.  
Notes:  
1. ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system. The ISA adapter Configuration  
Service Aid allows the identification and configuration of ISA adapters for  
Standalone Diagnostics. ISA adapters must be identified and configured before  
they can be tested.  
Select and run the diagnostic tests on the resources you are having problems with or  
select the All Resources option check all of the configured resources. Find the  
response in the following table and take the Action for it.  
Diagnostic Response  
An SRN is displayed.  
The system hangs.  
Action  
Go to “Step 14.”  
Report SRN 109-200.  
Press Enter and continue with the testing.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No trouble  
was found message is displayed, and you have  
not tested all of the resources.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No trouble  
was found message displayed and you have  
tested all of the resources.  
Go to “Step 17.”  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 14  
The diagnostics produced an SRN for this problem.  
1. Record the SRN and other numbers read out.  
2. Report the SRN to the service organization.  
3. STOP. You have completed these procedures.  
Step 15  
When you are loading the Standalone Diagnostics, the attributes for the terminal  
must be set to match the defaults of the diagnostic programs. The ASCII terminal  
must be attached to serial port 1 on the system unit.  
Are you going to load Standalone Diagnostics and run them from a ASCII  
terminal?  
NO  
Go to “Step 16.”  
YES  
Go to “Running the Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal” on page 6-3 and  
be sure your terminal attributes are set to work with the diagnostic  
programs.  
Return to “Step 16” when you finish checking the attributes. Record any  
settings that are changed.  
9-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 16  
This step loads the Standalone Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the  
diagnostics, go to “Step 7.”  
1. Turn the power on.  
2. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. When the keyboard indicator appears, press F5 on the direct attached keyboard  
or 5 on the ASCII keyboard to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
4. Enter any requested passwords.  
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7.”  
Go to “Step 9.”  
YES  
Step 17  
The diagnostics did not find a hardware problem. If you still have a problem, contact  
your software support center.  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics  
Use this procedure to obtain an error code. The service organization uses the error  
code to determine which field replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the  
system to correct operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Ÿ The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or a ASCII  
terminal attached to a serial port.  
Ÿ Go to “Step 2.”  
Step 2  
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 4.”  
Go to “Step 3.”  
YES  
9-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3  
This step attempts to load Online Diagnostics in service mode.  
1. Turn the power to off.  
2. Turn the power on.  
3. If the keyboard indicator appears, press F6 on the direct attached keyboard or 6  
on the ASCII keyboard to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
4. Enter any requested passwords.  
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
6. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5.”  
Go to “Step 6.”  
YES  
Step 4  
This step attempts to load the Standalone diagnostics.  
1. Turn the power to off.  
2. Turn the power to on.  
3. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
4. If the keyboard indicator appears, press F5 on the direct attached keyboard or 5  
on the ASCII keyboard to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
5. Enter any requested passwords.  
6. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
7. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5.”  
Go to “Step 6.”  
YES  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5  
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power LED does not come on, or comes on  
and does not stay on.  
Check the power cable to the outlet. Check the  
circuit breakers and check for power at the  
outlet.  
Assure the room temperature is within 60 -  
90°F.  
If you do not find a problem, record error code  
M0PS0000 and report the problem to the  
service organization.  
The system appears to be stopped and NO  
beep was heard from the system unit.  
Processor POST failure. Report error code  
M0CPU000.  
The system appears to be stopped and NO  
beep was heard from the system unit. E122,  
E123, or E124 is displayed on the operator  
panel display.  
No good memory could be found. Report error  
code M0MEM000.  
The system appears to be stopped a beep WAS  
heard from the system unit.  
No good memory could be found. Report error  
code M0MEM001.  
The diagnostics are loaded and there was NO  
beep heard from the system unit during the IPL  
sequence.  
Record error code M0SPK001.  
The system stops with the Diagnostic Operating  
Instructions displayed.  
Go to “Step 6.”  
The diskette LED is blinking rapidly, or E1EA or  
E1EB is displayed on the operator panel.  
The flash EPROM data is corrupted. The  
recovery procedure for the flash EPROM should  
be executed.  
The system stops with a prompt to enter a  
password.  
Enter the password. You are not be allowed to  
continue until a correct password has been  
entered. When you have entered a valid  
password, wait for one of the other conditions to  
occur.  
The system stops with an eight-digit error  
code(s) displayed on the console.  
Record the error code(s) and report the problem  
to the service organization.  
The system login prompt is displayed.  
You may not have pressed the correct key or  
you may not have pressed the key soon enough  
when you were to indicate a Service Mode boot  
of diagnostic programs. If this was the case,  
start over at the beginning of this step.  
If you are sure you pressed the correct key in a  
timely manner go to Step 7.  
9-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Action  
The system does not respond when the  
password is entered.  
Go to Step 7.  
The system stopped and an indicator is  
displayed on the system console and an  
eight-digit error code is not displayed.  
If the indicator (text or icon) represents:  
Ÿ a keyboard, record error code M0KBD000  
and report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Ÿ memory, record error code M0MEM002 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Ÿ SCSI, record error code M0CON000 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Ÿ Network, record error code M0NET000 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Ÿ Speaker/Audio, record error code  
M0BT0000 and report the problem to the  
service organization.  
The System Management Services menu is  
displayed.  
The device or media you are attempting to boot  
from may be faulty.  
1. Check the SMS error log for any errors. To  
check the error log:  
Ÿ Choose tools  
Ÿ Choose error log  
Ÿ If an error is logged, check the time  
stamp.  
Ÿ If the error was logged during the  
current boot attempt, record it and  
report it to your service person.  
Ÿ If no recent error is logged in the error  
log, continue to the next step below.  
2. If you are attempting to load the Online  
Diagnostics, try loading the Standalone  
Diagnostics. Otherwise, record error code  
M0SCSI01 and report to the service  
organization.  
The system appears to be stopped, the disk  
activity light is on continuously, and a beep was  
heard from the system unit.  
Record error code M0MEM001 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
The system stops and the message "STARTING  
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT ..." is displayed.  
Report error code M0BT0000.  
Report error code M0SCSI01.  
The message "The system will now continue the  
boot process" is displayed continuously on the  
system unit's console.  
Chapter 9. Hardware Problem Determination 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Go to “Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics” on  
page 9-1.  
Step 7  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table, then follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Keyboard Type  
Action  
101–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter  
key used. The Enter key is within one horizontal  
row of keys.  
Record error code M0KBD001 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
102–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter  
key used. The Enter key extends into two  
horizontal rows of keys.  
Record error code M0KBD002 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese  
characters.  
Record error code M0KBD003 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
ASCII–terminal keyboard. This applies to all  
attached terminals.  
Go to the documentation for problem  
determination for this type terminal.  
9-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. System Records  
Record the Identification Numbers  
Record and retain the following information.  
Product Name  
IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series  
CPU Type/Speed  
Serial Number  
Key Serial Number  
The server's identification numbers are located on the front cover and on the rear of  
the server.  
Appendix A. System Records A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device Records  
Use the following tables to keep a record of the options installed in or attached to  
your system. This information can be helpful when you install additional options in  
your server or if you ever need to have your server serviced.  
Table A-1. Internal and External Options  
Location  
Option Description  
Memory (J1/J2)  
Memory (J3/J4)  
Memory (J5/J6)  
Memory (J7/J8)  
Memory (J9/J10)  
Memory (J11/J12)  
Memory (J13/J14)  
Memory (J15/J16)  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
32MB Ø 128MB Ø  
Mouse Connector  
Keyboard Connector  
Expansion Slot 9  
Expansion Slot 8  
Expansion Slot 7  
Expansion Slot 6  
Expansion Slot 5  
Expansion Slot 4  
Expansion Slot 3  
Expansion Slot 2  
Expansion Slot 1  
Parallel Port  
IBM Mouse Ø Other:____________________________  
Space Saving Ø Enhanced Ø Other:______________  
Serial Port 1  
Serial Port 2  
Serial Port 3  
A-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Refer to the following diagram of your server's bays when completing Table A-2 on  
page A-4.  
Notes:  
Ÿ If you attach a drive or other device to an adapter, record the  
expansion-slot number for that adapter in the adapter field of table A-2.  
Ÿ Your model might have more preinstalled drives than shown in this table.  
Appendix A. System Records A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table A-2. Internal Files and Devices  
Adapter  
Location  
SCSI ID  
Drive Description  
Integrated Bay A1  
Integrated Bay A2  
Integrated Bay B1  
Integrated Bay B2  
4
CD-ROM Drive  
Non-SCSI  
3.5-Inch 1.44MB Diskette Drive  
6
5
Bank C Bay 1  
8
Bank C Bay 2  
Bank C Bay 3  
Bank C Bay 4  
Bank C Bay 5  
Bank C Bay 6  
Bank D Bay 1  
Bank D Bay 2  
Bank D Bay 3  
Bank D Bay 4  
Bank D Bay 5  
Bank D Bay 6  
Bank E Bay 1  
Bank E Bay 2  
Bank E Bay 3  
Bank E Bay 4  
Bank E Bay 5  
Bank E Bay 6  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
A-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B. Replacing the Battery  
The manufacturer has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium  
battery must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the  
battery, be sure to adhere to the following instructions.  
CAUTION:  
A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or severe burn. Do not recharge,  
disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or  
expose cell contents to water. Keep away from children. Replace only with the  
part number specified for your system. Use of another battery may present a  
risk of fire or explosion.  
The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.  
Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.  
Appendix B. Replacing the Battery B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your system (custom boot  
list, IP parameters, etc.) and reset the system date and time.  
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Removing  
Both the Front and Side Covers” on page 5-10.  
2. Remove the system board cover as described in “Removing the I/O Planar  
Cover” on page 5-16.  
3. Locate the battery on the system board.  
B-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Remove the battery:  
a. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the front of the server.  
(The spring mechanism behind the battery pushes it out toward you as you  
slide it forward.)  
b. Use your thumb and index finger to hold the battery as it pushes out of the  
socket.  
5. Insert the new battery:  
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket.  
b. As you slide it toward the front of the server, push it down into the socket.  
6. Reconfigure your system and reset the system date and time. If you are running  
AIX the bootlist command may have to be run from AIX while logged in as root,  
this restores the custom boot list and allow the option of Select Software under  
multiboot to start the operating system. Other parameters that may have to be  
rebuilt are the IP parameters.  
7. Replace the covers as described in “Replacing Both the Front and Side Covers”  
on page 5-96.  
Appendix B. Replacing the Battery B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test  
For your convenience, here is an example Service Processor setup checklist. It is  
basic. Your setup may include more or less of the available features, so you may  
wish to adjust this checklist for your own application. This checklist will at least  
provide you with a starting place.  
Service Processor Setup Checklist  
1. Unplug the power cord from the server.  
2. Attach a local terminal for this setup procedure.  
3. Plug in the server and power on the local terminal.  
Attention:Server power should remain off.  
4. Bring up the Service Processor Menus, see Chapter 4, “Service Processor  
Menus” on page 4-1.  
5. Set the System Name, “Privileged User Menus” on page 4-6.  
6. Enable Surveillance, see 4-8, and “Service Processor Functions and Features”  
on page 4-24  
7. Configure Call-In/Call-Out, see “CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU” on  
page 4-16 and “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 4-16.  
8. Exit the Service Processor menus  
9. Unplug the power cord from the server.  
10. Attach modem(s) (if needed), page 4-3  
11. Plug in the server  
Attention: Server power should remain off.  
12. Test  
Call-In, page C-2  
Call-Out, page C-2  
13. Backup the service processor settings, as described in “Save or Restore  
Hardware Management Policies Service Aid” on page 7-9.  
Note: This is strongly recommended to protect the usefulness of the service  
processor and the availability of the server.  
Your Service Processor is ready to go to work.  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Testing the Setup  
The following is a sample procedure to assure your setup is working.  
These tests include communicating with the server operating system. Be sure the  
necessary serial port(s) is configured. If you need assistance, refer to “Serial Port  
Configuration” on page C-3.  
The server should be powered off as a result of the “Service Processor Setup  
Checklist” on page C-1.  
Call-In:  
1. Go to your remote terminal and call-in to your server. Your server should  
answer and offer you the Service Processor Main Menu after requesting your  
privileged access password.  
2. Enter item 2, System Power Control Menu.  
3. Enter item 4, Power-On System.  
Answer "y" when asked if you wish to continue powering on the system.  
4. After the system firmware and operating system have initialized the server, the  
login prompt should appear at your remote terminal if you set up seamless  
modem transfer (refer to page D-6 for more information). This may take several  
minutes. When this occurs, you have successfully called into the Service  
Processor.  
5. Type logout to disconnect from the operating system. The message "No  
Carrier" displays on your remote terminal.  
6. Call your server again. The operating system should answer and offer you the  
login prompt.  
If these tests are successful, call-in is working.  
7. Login in and command your server to shutdown and power off. (The AIX  
command shutdown -F will do this.)  
8. The message "No Carrier" displays on your remote terminal.  
Call-Out:  
During the setup, you entered your phone number for the Pager (on page 4-19) and  
Customer Voice (on page 4-20) phone numbers. These numbers are used for this  
test.  
1. Your remote terminal should be disconnected as a result of the Call-In test.  
C-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Call your server again.  
3. At the Service Processor Main Menu, select Call-In/Call-Out Setup menu, then  
select Call-Out test. This causes a simulated error condition for the purposes of  
this test.  
4. After a few moments, a message appears regarding an illegal entry. Press Enter  
to clear the message and return to the main menu.  
5. When your telephone rings, answer the call. You should hear the sound of a  
telephone being dialed. This is your computer trying to page you.  
If this test is successful, call-out is working.  
You now need to go back through the “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on  
page 4-18 to enter the actual telephone numbers your server will use for reporting  
problems.  
Serial Port Configuration  
To configure the serial port on an AIX system, enter the following commands from an  
AIX console:  
1. Log in as root.  
2. To find if you have any serial ports already configured, enter:  
lsdev -Cc tty  
If no serial ports are configured, none are listed. If you wish to configure serial  
ports that are not listed, continue with the remaining steps.  
3. Identify the serial port(s) with the modem(s).  
4. Enter  
smit tty  
5. Select add tty  
6. Select RS232  
7. Select Baud rate 96ðð or higher.  
8. Select login enable and set the flow control to RTS.  
9. Commit the selections and set up any other needed serial ports.  
10. Exit SMIT.  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
With nearly 1000 modems to choose from, and various programming standards,  
configuring a modem for use with the Service Processor can be challenging. The  
Service Processor is designed to place little demand on an attached modem, thereby  
increasing the setup and connection success rates. Several sample modem  
configurations files are supplied that will either work directly with your modem, or  
provide a good starting point for a custom setup, if required. These files are included  
on the Sample Modem Configuration Files diskette and in your Service Processor  
firmware with the following names:  
Diskette File Name  
modem_z.cfg  
Service Processor Firmware File Name  
modem_z.sp  
modem_z0.cfg  
modem_f.cfg  
modem_z0.sp  
modem_f.sp  
modem_f0.cfg  
modem_f1.cfg  
modem_f0.sp  
modem_f1.sp  
The sample modem configuration files can be found in the /usr/share/modems  
subdirectory, if your server is using AIX. A listing of each file is included at the end  
of this appendix.  
With the following selection procedures and your modem manual, one of these  
configuration files should be suitable for your use.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration File Selection  
1. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?  
If yes, go to 3  
If not, continue with 2 below.  
2. Does your modem respond to:  
a. ATZ reset command, or  
b. ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?  
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended.  
If ATZn, configuration file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.  
If yes, go to 5 on page D-3  
If not, continue with 3 below.  
3. Does your modem command set include a test for v.42 error correction at the  
remote modem (often called "Auto-Reliable Mode")?  
If yes, and enabled is the default, this test must be disabled. See “Customizing  
the Modem Configuration Files” on page D-3 for more information.  
If not, continue with 4 on page D-3.  
D-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Does your modem respond to:  
a. AT&F reset command, or  
b. AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?  
If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended.  
If AT&Fn, configuration file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended,  
depending on which provides the hardware flow control profile.  
5. Selection is complete. If you find it necessary to adjust any of these  
configuration files, do so with reference to the manual that came with your  
modem.1 Choose settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.  
Examples  
Modem  
Setup Z  
Setup Z0  
(Rare)  
Setup F  
Setup F0  
Setup F1  
*
AT&T DataPort 2001  
Bocamodem 1440E  
X
X
Hayes Smart Modem 300  
IBM 5841  
X
X
X
IBM 5843  
IBM 7851  
X
X
IBM 7852-010  
IBM 7855  
X
X
USRobotics  
33.6K Sportster  
Zoom V.32  
X
*Ring interrupt only on first ring.  
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files  
You can create your own modem configuration file(s) or modify the samples  
provided. After you customize your modem configuration files, you MUST access  
them via the Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the  
Service Processor menus.  
1
Some older modems do not respond to the commands or &R1. You should edit out these  
commands from the modem configuration file if yours is such a modem. See your modem manual for  
more information.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and  
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, specify your customized  
modem configuration files from the service aid.  
If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and  
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, you may set them up with  
the service aids while you specify your customized modem configuration files.  
To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem  
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model to modify.  
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.  
2. Copy /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg to make a new file with the name (for  
example) modem_fx.cfg.  
3. In modem_fx.cfg, change the line Send "ATEðT\r" to Send "ATcccEðT\r" where  
ccc is the added command found in your modem manual.  
Make this change to the third line of each of the following stanzas:  
Ÿ condout  
Ÿ condin  
Ÿ ripo  
4. Save the changes.  
Use this new modem configuration file as described at the top of this section.  
Xon/Xoff Modems  
Some modems of the mid-80's vintage assume software flow control (Xon/Xoff)  
between the computer and the modem. Modems with this design send extra  
characters during and after the transmitted data. The Service Processor cannot  
tolerate these extra characters. If your configuration includes such a modem, your  
functional results may be unpredictable.  
The sample modem configuration files included in this package do not support these  
modems, so custom configuration files would be necessary. Anchor Automation  
2400E is an example of such a modem.  
Most newer modems do not use this design. It is recommended you use modems of  
newer vintage if you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be  
due to Xon/Xoff characters.  
D-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ring Detection  
Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they detect a ring signal.  
Some modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal they receive. AT&T  
DataPort 2001 is an example of such a modem.  
The Service Processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings  
when Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an  
interrupt on only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring.  
Otherwise, you may choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count that  
makes your operation convenient.  
Terminal Emulators  
The Service Processor is compatible with simple ASCII terminals, and therefore  
compatible with most emulators. It is for the cases when a remote session is  
handed off from the Service Processor to the operating system that agreeing terminal  
emulators becomes important.  
The server's operating system will have some built-in terminal emulators. You may  
also have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local  
and host computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so the key  
assignments and responses will match. This will assure successful communications  
and control.  
For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.  
Recovery Procedures  
Line noises, power surges, etc., can sometimes cause your modem to enter an  
undefined state. When it is being used for dial in, dial out or Ring Indicate  
Power-On, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions is expected. If  
one of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has been initialized, it  
may be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your modem communicates properly with remote users, it is probably in control. It  
may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change  
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to  
assure it has been initialized recently.  
Another strategy, particularly if your system is difficult to access physically, is to  
protect it with an Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge  
protector.  
In case recovery becomes necessary, your system should be shut down as  
gracefully as possible. Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to  
drain capacitance while power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem  
power, then reconnect system power to allow complete reinitialization of your system.  
Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session  
There are about as many modem command variations as there are modems. The  
sample modem configuration files have been written to capture the largest number of  
workable modem settings.  
The modem command &Dn (where 'n' is a number) generally sets the modem  
response to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server's serial port. The  
desired response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled,  
and drop the connection when DTR is released. This is the mechanism by which the  
server "hangs up" on a connection under normal conditions.  
Usually the command &D2 will work, but not always. The sample modem  
configuration files2 take this high percentage position. You should consult your  
modem's manual for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.  
There are two methods for dealing with the modem's response to DTR:  
1. Recovery  
2. Prevention  
Before proceeding with one of these strategies, you need to determine if your  
server's modem is set up properly to respond to DTR.  
D-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the primary  
console device, there are two tests you can perform:  
1. Will the modem drop the connection after the "System initialization complete"  
message appears at the remote terminal?  
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.  
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your modem manual  
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of  
the sample modem configuration files2.  
2. Will the server's modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make this  
observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shutdown and  
power off. (The AIX command shutdown -F will do this.) Watch for the message  
NO CARRIER on your remote terminal.  
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.  
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your model manual  
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of  
the sample modem configuration files2.  
Recovery Strategy  
The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to establish a remote session.  
This is the easiest solution to implement, and allows more freedom for configuring  
your server's serial ports.  
To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the Service Processor and start the  
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be  
dropped. At this point, you call the server back and the operating system will answer  
and offer you the login prompt.  
2
Only the following sample modem configuration files contain the &Dn command (in three places each):  
Ÿ modem_f.cfg  
Ÿ modem_f0.cfg  
Ÿ modem_f1.cfg  
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response. If your remote  
terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command the remote terminal emulator to hang  
up. This then breaks the connection.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prevention Strategy  
The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it initializes the primary  
console. The tests listed above are conducted with the remote terminal selected as  
the primary console to manifest the modem's response to DTR transitions.  
If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your  
server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal will no  
longer experience the connection loss.  
If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either  
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This  
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.  
If you choose to use the unused serial port as the primary console, some  
initialization traffic will be sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result,  
that serial device's connection and function could be affected. These impacts may  
make that port unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.  
D-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modem Configuration Samples  
Sample File modem_z.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayesᑍ compatible modems.  
# This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
# This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage  
# modems which respond to neither the ATZð reset command nor the extended (&)  
# commands. Refer to your modem manual.  
#
# ᑍ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 1ð  
CallDelay 12ð  
# AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
# Z  
Reset to factory defaults Qð  
# Eð Turn echo off  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
# Vð Use numeric responses  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
# Hð Hang-up  
#
#
Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit  
Sð=2 Answer on second ring  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
# %N Call-Out phone number  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# %S Modem speed (available to users)  
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZQðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATQðVðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
# (i.e., hang up).  
send "ATHðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATEðQ1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
# Disable responses.  
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZQðT\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 1ð  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
# or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
# time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð  
delay 2  
send "ATHðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZQðT\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
D-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_z0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Zð  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayesᑍ compatible modems.  
# This example uses the ATZð reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
# This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZð command  
# and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem  
# manual.  
#
# ᑍ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 1ð  
CallDelay 12ð  
# AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
# Zð Reset. Restore Profile ð Qð  
# Eð Turn echo off  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
# Vð Use numeric responses  
Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
Sð=2 Answer on second ring  
# Hð Hang-up  
Xð=ð Limit modem response codes  
#
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
# %N Call-Out phone number  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# %S Modem speed (available to users)  
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZðQðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
# (i.e., hang up).  
send "ATHðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATEðQ1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
# Disable responses.  
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZðQðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 1ð  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
# or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
# time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð  
delay 2  
send "ATHðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZðQðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
D-12 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayesᑍ compatible modems.  
# This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to  
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file  
# Fð or F1 is recommended.  
#
# ᑍ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 1ð  
CallDelay 12ð  
# AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
# &F Reset to default profile Qð  
# Eð Turn echo off  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
# Vð Use numeric responses  
Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
Sð=2 Answer on second ring  
# Hð Hang-up  
Xð=ð Limit modem response codes  
#
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
# &C1 Detect CD  
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
#
# %N Call-Out phone number  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# %S Modem speed (available to users)  
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&FQðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
# (i.e., hang up).  
send "ATHðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATEðQ1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
# Disable responses.  
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&FQðT\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 1ð  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
# or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
page:  
ripo:  
error:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
# time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð  
delay 2  
send "ATHðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
send "AT&FQðT\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
D-14 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Fð  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayesᑍ compatible modems.  
# This example uses the AT&Fð reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to  
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn't  
# work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.  
#
# ᑍ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 1ð  
CallDelay 12ð  
# AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
# &Fð Reset. Restore profile ð Qð  
# Eð Turn echo off  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
# Vð Use numeric responses  
Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
Sð=2 Answer on second ring  
# Hð Hang-up  
Xð=ð Limit modem response codes  
#
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
# &C1 Detect CD  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# %N Call-Out phone number  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# %S Modem speed (available to users)  
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&FðQðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
D-16 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
# (i.e., hang up).  
send "ATHðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATEðQ1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
# Disable responses.  
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&FðQðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 1ð  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
# or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
# time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð  
delay 2  
send "ATHðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&FðQðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile ð  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
# Confirm command successful.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
done  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
D-18 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f1.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayesᑍ compatible modems.  
# This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
# This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work  
# properly with setup Fð. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is  
# recommended.  
#
# ᑍ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 1ð  
CallDelay 12ð  
# AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Qð  
# Eð Turn echo off  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
# Vð Use numeric responses  
Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
Sð=2 Answer on second ring  
# Hð Hang-up  
Xð=ð Limit modem response codes  
#
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
# &C1 Detect CD  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# %N Call-Out phone number  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# %S Modem speed (available to users)  
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F1QðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
timeout 6ð  
retry:  
done  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
# (i.e., hang up).  
send "ATHðT\r"  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATEðQ1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
# Disable responses.  
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F1QðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=2\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 1ð  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
# or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 6ð  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
# time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð  
delay 2  
send "ATHðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F1QðT\r"  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATEðT\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),  
send "ATQðVðXðT\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "ATSð=ð\r"  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
# Ignore RTS.  
expect "ð\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
D-20 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-22 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases  
This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the Service Processor (SP).  
SP Power Applied  
6
┌─────┐  
Pre-Standby Phase  
6
6
Standby Phase SP Menus Available  
6
Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available  
6
Runtime Phase Diagnostic Service Aids Available  
└──────────────────┘  
Pre-Standby Phase  
This phase is entered when the server is connected to a power source. The server  
may or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited when the Power-On Self  
Tests (POSTS) and configurations tasks are completed.  
The Pre-Standby phase components are:  
Ÿ SP Initialization  
SP performs any necessary hardware and software initializations.  
Ÿ SP POST  
SP conducts Power-On Self Tests on its various work and code areas.  
Ÿ SP Unattended Start Mode Checks  
To assist fault recovery. If unattended start mode is set, the SP automatically  
reboots the server. SP will not wait for a user-input or power-on command, but  
will move straight through the phase and into the Bringup Phase. The  
unattended start mode can be reset by accessing SMS menus, or SP menus.  
Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standby Phase  
The standby phase can be reached in two ways:  
1. With the server OFF and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in  
the LCD display.  
2. With the server ON after an operating system fault, recognized by STBY or an  
8-digit code in the LCD display.  
In the Standby phase, the SP takes care of some automatic duties and is available  
for menus operation. The SP remains in the standby phase until a power-on request  
is detected.  
The Standby phase components are:  
Ÿ Modem Configuration  
SP will configure the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls may be received,  
or outgoing calls may be placed.  
Ÿ Dial In  
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the  
password and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be  
mirrored on the local ASCII console if the server is so equipped and the user  
enables this function.  
Ÿ Menus  
The SP menus are password protected. Before you can access them you need  
to know either General User (Power-On Password or POP) or Privileged User  
(Privileged Access Password or PAP).  
Bring-Up Phase  
This phase is entered upon power-on, and exited upon loading of the operating  
system.  
The Bring-up phase components are:  
Ÿ Retry Request Check  
The SP will check to see if the previous IPL attempt failed. If two consecutive  
fails are detected, the SP displays an error code and places an outgoing call to  
notify an external party if the user has enabled this option.  
Ÿ Dial Out  
E-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The SP can dial a pre-programmed telephone number in the event of an IPL  
failure. The SP issues an error report with the last reported IPL status indicated  
and any other available error information.  
Ÿ Update Operator Panel  
The SP displays Operator Panel data on the ASCII terminal if a remote  
connection is active.  
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring  
Environmental Monitoring is now controlled by the SP instead of the base  
system, with expanded error recording and reporting.  
Ÿ System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)  
The SP will monitor and time the interval between system firmware heartbeats.  
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands  
The SP will respond to any command issued by the system processor.  
Runtime Phase  
This phase includes the tasks that the SP performs during steady-state execution of  
the operating system.  
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring  
The SP monitors voltages, temperatures and fan speeds (on some servers).  
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands  
The SP will respond to any command issued by the system processor.  
Ÿ Run-Time Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)  
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the SP will monitor the  
system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the SP places an outgoing call.  
This is different from the Bringup Phase scenario where two reboot attempts are  
made before placing an outgoing call.  
Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
bank D, or E  
installing a SSA backplane 5-66  
battery  
replacement B-1  
before you begin 1-2  
Numerics  
3.5–inch diskette drive  
using 2-10  
4-mm tape cartridge  
loading 2-39  
unloading 2-40  
C
4.0GB 4-mm tape drive  
general information 2-31  
status lights 2-37  
using 2-37  
5.0GB 8-mm tape drive  
status lights 2-24  
using 2-24  
cable label 5-62  
call home, see call out  
call out (call-home) 4-31  
call-in  
testing C-2  
call-out  
policy 4-20  
testing C-2  
8-mm tape cartridge  
loading 2-26  
CD-ROM  
unloading 2-28  
installing 5-44  
8-mm tape drive  
CD-ROM drive  
general information 2-20  
removing 5-82  
CD–ROM drive  
A
using 2-12  
about this book xvii  
account number 4-22  
adapters  
check points 4-5, 4-14  
checklist 1-4, 1-8  
checklist, setup C-1  
clearances for air circulation 1-8, 5-99  
connect cables 5-100  
connecting the cables 1-5  
console mirroring  
enable/disable 4-9  
quick disconnect 4-32  
system configuration 4-32  
CPU card 5-37  
installing 5-30  
removing 5-34  
air circulation clearances 1-8, 5-99  
B
back view 5-5  
bank C, D, or E  
installing a disk drive 5-51  
installing a SSA disk drive 5-55  
removing a SSA disk drive 5-87  
bank D or E  
upgrading or adding 5-37  
customer administration center 4-19  
installing a backplane 5-59  
Index X-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
G
device records A-2  
internal and external options A-2  
internal files and devices A-4  
devices, startup 3-8  
diagnostic considerations  
running from a TTY terminal 6-3  
running online 6-2  
running standalone 6-2  
diagnostics  
general access password,  
changing 4-9  
general information for 4.0GB 4-mm  
tape drive 2-31  
general information for 8-mm tape  
drive 2-20  
general user menus 4-4  
H
general attributes 6-4  
diagnostics, sources 6-1  
dial-out telephone numbers,  
setting 4-18  
half-high drives 5-42  
handling static-sensitive devices 5-3  
hardware problem determination 9-1  
heartbeat 4-29  
disk drive  
hot swap disk drives  
using 2-15  
installing 5-44  
removing 5-82  
I
E
I/O planar cover  
electrical safety xii  
EPROM  
removal 5-16  
replacement 5-101  
install cables 5-100  
installing  
updates 4-33  
error logs 4-14  
expansion bays 5-4, 5-41  
expansion slots 5-30  
adapters 5-30  
CD-ROM 5-44  
disk drive 5-44  
F
front and side covers 5-96  
internal drives 5-41  
memory-modules 5-24  
tape drive 5-44  
finishing the installation 1-8  
front and side covers  
installing 5-96  
removing 5-10  
front covers  
installing a backplane  
in bank D 5-59  
installing 5-93  
removing 5-6  
front view 5-4  
full-high drives 5-42  
in bank E 5-59  
installing a backplane in bank D 5-59  
installing a backplane in bank E 5-59  
installing a disk drive  
in bank C, D, or E 5-51  
X-2 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
installing a disk drive in bank C, D, or  
E. 5-51  
memory-modules  
installing 5-24  
installing a SSA backplane in bank D,  
or E 5-66  
menu inactivity 4-3  
menus  
installing a SSA disk drive  
in bank C, D, or E 5-55  
installing a SSA disk drive in bank C,  
D, or E. 5-55  
installing a U-bolt 5-91  
installing adapters 5-30  
installing front and side covers 5-96  
installing internal drives 5-41  
installing memory 5-18  
installing memory-modules 5-24  
internal drives  
general user 4-4  
privileged user 4-6  
service processor 4-3  
service processor call-in/call-out  
setup 4-16  
service processor call-out policy  
setup 4-20  
service processor customer account  
setup 4-22  
service processor language  
selection 4-15  
considerations 5-42  
installing 5-41  
service processor reboot policy  
setup 4-23  
removing 5-81  
service processor serial port  
selection 4-17  
service processor serial port speed  
setup 4-18  
service processor setup 4-8  
service processor system  
information 4-13  
K
keyboards  
using 2-4  
L
service processor system power  
control 4-12  
label, cable 5-62  
language selection 4-15  
laser compliance statement xiii  
laser safety information xiii  
loading the 4-mm tape cartridge 2-39  
loading the 8-mm tape cartridge 2-26  
location codes 6-14  
service processor telephone  
setup 4-18  
support menus  
service processor menus 4-2  
service processor service  
aids 4-2  
SMS 4-2  
modem  
M
configuration file selection D-2  
configurations D-1  
seamless transfer D-6  
modem_f.cfg, sample file D-13  
modem_f0.cfg, sample file D-16  
media cables 5-48  
memory 5-18  
removing 5-28  
upgrading or adding 5-18  
Index X-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
modem_f1.cfg, sample file D-19  
modem_z.cfg, sample file D-9  
modem_z0.cfg, sample file D-11  
modes of operation  
POST errors  
read 4-5, 4-14  
power-on methods 4-26  
preface xvii  
online diagnostics 6-9  
mouse  
preinstallation steps 5-43  
preinstalled devices 5-41  
primary console D-8  
privileged access password,  
changing 4-9  
privileged user menus 4-6  
problem determination  
using the standalone or online  
diagnostics 9-1, 9-10  
when unable to load  
using 2-6  
N
nonremovable media 5-41  
NVRAM 4-14  
O
OK E-2  
diagnostics 9-10  
online diagnostics  
concurrent mode 6-10  
maintenance mode 6-11  
service mode 6-9  
online diagnostics modes of  
operation 6-9  
operating considerations  
standalone and online  
diagnostics 6-1  
operational phases, SP  
standby E-2  
operator panel display 2-3  
option list 5-17  
progress indicators 4-5, 4-14  
protecting the system 1-2  
R
read system, POST errors 4-5, 4-14  
reading the operator panel display 2-3  
rear view 5-5  
reboot recovery 4-23, 4-27  
reconfiguring the system B-3  
records, device A-2  
related publications xvii  
remote latency 4-21  
remote timeout 4-21  
removable media 5-41  
removing  
options 5-17  
P
adapters 5-34  
CD-ROM drive 5-82  
disk drive 5-82  
pager 4-18, 4-19  
passwords  
changing general access  
password 4-9  
changing privileged access  
password 4-9  
overview 4-9  
front and side covers 5-10  
front covers 5-6  
internal drives 5-81  
memory 5-28  
SSA disk drive from bank C, D, or  
E
5-87  
tape drive 5-82  
X-4 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
removing adapters 5-34  
removing both the front and side  
covers 5-10  
service processor menus (continued)  
customer account 4-22  
general user 4-4  
removing internal drives 5-81  
removing memory 5-28  
language selection 4-15  
menu inactivity 4-3  
removing the front covers only 5-6  
removing the I/O planar cover 5-16  
replacement batteries, ordering B-1  
replacing the battery B-1  
replacing the covers 5-93, 5-96  
replacing the I/O planar cover 5-101  
reset Service Processor 4-11  
restart recovery 4-23, 4-27  
RETAIN 4-22  
privileged user 4-6  
reboot policy 4-23  
restart policy 4-23  
serial port selection 4-17  
serial port speed setup 4-18  
setup menu 4-8  
supported menu options 4-2  
system information 4-13  
system power control 4-12  
telephone number 4-18  
service processor setup C-1  
service processor setup checklist C-1  
service processor test C-1  
service provider 4-19  
setting up IBM RS/6000 7025 F50  
Series 1-1  
retries 4-21  
ring indicator power-on 4-12  
running the online diagnostics in  
concurrent mode 6-11  
running the online diagnostics in  
maintenance mode 6-11  
running the online diagnostics in  
service mode 6-9  
slim-high drives 5-42  
sp checklist C-1  
running the standalone  
diagnostics 6-12  
sp installation  
checklist C-1  
SP operational phases E-1  
sp setup C-1  
sp test C-1  
S
safety considerations 5-1  
safety notices xi  
speed, memory 5-24  
standalone and online diagnostics  
operating considerations 6-1  
standalone diagnostic operation 6-12  
standalone diagnostics  
running 6-12  
seamless transfer of a modem  
session D-6  
sequence, startup 3-8  
service center 4-19  
service processor  
service processor checklist C-1  
checklist C-1  
start talk mode 4-10  
Start Up program 3-8  
starting system programs 3-1, 3-24  
starting the system 1-6  
starting the system unit 2-1  
service processor menus  
accessing locally 4-3  
accessing remotely 4-3  
call-in/call-out 4-16  
call-out policy 4-20  
Index X-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
static-sensitive devices, handling 5-3  
STBY E-2  
tools 5-91  
trademarks xvii  
stopping the system unit 2-1  
storage devices 5-4  
surveillance  
U
ubolt, installing 5-91  
failure 4-29  
unattended start mode,  
enable/disable 4-12  
United Kingdom’s telephone line  
requirements xii  
unloading the 4-mm tape  
cartridge 2-40  
unloading the 8-mm tape  
cartridge 2-28  
unlocking the system door 5-6, 5-10  
unpacking the system 1-3  
Unplug all power cords (cables) 5-12  
upgrading or adding  
operating system 4-29  
set parameters 4-11  
system firmware 4-29  
Sys Config program 3-5  
system administrator 4-19  
system information menu 4-13  
system phone number 4-20  
system POST errors  
read 4-5, 4-14  
system power-on methods 4-26  
system programs 3-1  
Start Up 3-8  
CPU card 5-37  
memory 5-18  
starting 3-1, 3-24  
Sys Config 3-5  
Utilities 3-10  
upgrading or adding CPU card 5-37  
using  
system records A-1  
key serial number A-1  
machine type/model A-1  
serial number A-1  
system startup 1-1  
system unit  
system verification procedure 8-1  
using the 3.5–inch diskette drive 2-10  
using the 4.0GB 4-mm tape drive 2-37  
using the 5.0GB 8-mm tape drive 2-24  
using the CD–ROM drive 2-12  
using the hot swap disk drives 2-15  
using the keyboards 2-4  
using the mouse 2-6  
starting 2-1  
stopping 2-1  
using the system verification  
procedure 8-1  
Utilities program 3-10  
T
tape drive  
installing 5-44  
removing 5-82  
telephone line requirements for the  
United Kingdom xii  
testing the setup  
call-in C-2  
V
voice phone number 4-20  
VPD (vital product data) 4-13  
call-out C-2  
X-6 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index X-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X-8 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reader's Comments — We'd Like to Hear From You  
&title.  
Part Number: &partnum.  
Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very  
Satisfied  
Very  
Dissatisfied Dissatisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Overall Satisfaction  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very  
Very  
Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Dissatisfied Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
Complete  
Easy to find  
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your response. May we contact you? Ø Yes Ø No  
When you send comments to us, you grant us a nonexclusive right to use or  
distribute your comments in any way we believe appropriate without incurring  
any obligation to you.  
X-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X-10 IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBM  
Part Number: 07L8342  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
February 1998  
SA38-ð54ð-ð1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Sander T26417 T26418 User Manual
Haier Washer HW C1260TVE User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Nail Gun 46240 B User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Stove 44894 User Manual
Havis Shields Automobile Accessories C TCB 17 User Manual
Honeywell Fan HW 400 Series User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Hardware FSPCI64S User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Network Card BL30p User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Vacuum Cleaner 8340a User Manual
Husqvarna Lawn Mower 18 ProFlex 20 ProFlex User Manual